JP2012019933A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine increased in excitement and enjoyment of a game.SOLUTION: When a pushbutton is operated a prescribed number of times (10 times, for example) during an operation effective period of a stop symbol announcement performance, right and left decoration symbols are stopped after performance branch timing, and after that, a pseudo continuous variation, a ready-to-win sign performance or the like is executed. Meanwhile, when the pushbutton is not operated prescribed number of times during the operation effective period of the stop symbol announcement performance, the right and left decoration symbols are stopped after a performance of [slide] is executed after the performance branch timing, and after that, the pseudo continuous variation, the ready-to-win sign performance or the like is executed. In such a way, a content of the performance is branched according to the presence or absence of a prescribed operation to the pushbutton.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is launched into a game area by a launching device, and the game medium wins a prize area such as a prize opening provided in the game area, a prize game medium such as a predetermined number of prize balls is obtained. Some are paid out to players. In addition, a variable display device is provided that can variably display identification information (also referred to as “variation”) when a game medium wins in a predetermined winning area (start winning opening) (start condition is established). There are some which are configured to be controllable to a specific game state (big hit game state) advantageous to the player when the display result of the variable display of the identification information becomes the specific display result (big hit symbol).

  As such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine that performs an effect of giving advance notice of identification information to be stopped by the variable display device. In addition, a gaming machine has also been proposed in which after performing such a notice, the notice identification information is changed to further execute an effect of notifying that different identification information is stopped (for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-239158 A

  In the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, only the object of notice is changed on the gaming machine side, and there is a possibility that the production becomes monotonous. In such a gaming machine, it is desired to further improve the interest of the game.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine with improved gaming interests.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the present invention includes a plurality of variable display units that variably display a plurality of types of identification information (for example, decorative symbols) that can be distinguished from each other, and display and display a display result. A variable display means (for example, the image display device 5 or the like), and a specific display result that is predetermined for the variable display means (for example, a definite decorative pattern of a jackpot combination) is derived and displayed. It is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like) that is controlled to a gaming state (for example, a big hit gaming state), and whether or not to control to the specific gaming state is derived from the display result of the identification information. Predetermined means determined in advance (for example, a portion where the CPU 103 executes the process of step S240) and a predetermined special effect are executed based on the determination result of the prior determined means. The special effect determining means for determining whether or not the special effect determining means (for example, the part where the CPU 103 executes the processing of steps S271 and S273) and the special effect determining means determine that the special effect is to be executed. Before the display result of the variable display of information is derived and displayed, the display mode of the plurality of variable display units is a special display mode (for example, reach state, pseudo-continuous chance (strong chance, weak chance)), Special effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs reach effect in the process of step S172) that executes the special effect after selecting a chance, a development opportunity, a look-ahead opportunity, a special decorative pattern, etc. And a portion that executes a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”), and the display mode of the plurality of variable display units is the special display mode. Before, in at least some of the plurality of variable display units, the mode notification means for notifying which display mode the display mode of the plurality of variable display units will be (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control) In the process of S172, a portion for executing a stop symbol notice effect) and an operation means (for example, push button 31B or stick controller 30) that can be operated by the player are provided. Special mode notifying means for notifying that the display mode of the variable display unit becomes the display mode constituting the special display mode (for example, in the processing of the effect control CPU 120 in step S172, the stop symbol preview effect pattern TZP2-1, TZP3-1, TZP4-1 stop symbol notice execution part, etc.) and a table of the part of the variable display part Non-special mode notification means for notifying that the display mode is a display mode that does not constitute the special display mode (for example, in the process of step S172, the control CPU 120 for the effect control displays the stop symbol notification effect of the stop symbol notification effect pattern TZP1-1) And the operation means is operated by the player after notifying that the display mode of the part of the variable display unit is a display mode that does not constitute the special display mode, Notification content changing means for changing the notification to a notification indicating that the display mode constitutes the special display mode (for example, in the processing in step S172, the effect control CPU 120 stops the stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP2-2, TZP3-2). , A portion for executing a stop symbol notice effect of TZP4-2, etc.).
According to such a configuration, after notifying that the display mode does not constitute a special display mode, the operation unit is operated by the player, so that the notification is changed to a display mode constituting the special display mode. Therefore, it is possible to produce an effect that increases the degree of expectation of entering a specific gaming state by the player's operation, and the entertainment of the game is improved.

The mode notifying unit may change the display modes of the other variable display units other than the at least some of the variable display units to a predetermined display mode, and then, in the at least some of the variable display units, the plurality of variable display units. The display mode of the display unit is notified (for example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the stop symbol notification effect only in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the processing of step S172. In the stop symbol notice effect in which the notice symbol is displayed only in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5R, when the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed in the “left” ornament symbol display area 5L, the ornament symbol and the “right” are displayed. The combination with the notice symbol displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5R indicates whether or not a reach state is reached, whether the pseudo-continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 or the second chance of opening T Whether constituting part of 1~TC4 may be broadcast to) as.
According to such a configuration, a plurality of notification patterns can be provided, and the production can be surprising.

The special effect execution means displays a first display form as the special display form, and then executes a reach effect execution means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the process of step S172). In this case, after the second display mode is displayed as the special display mode, a re-variation effect that resumes variable display is executed once or a plurality of times as the special display. Fluctuating effect execution means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” in the process of step S172), and the special effect determining means has a number of times of the re-variable effect. It is determined that the re-variation effect is to be executed so that the ratio controlled to the specific gaming state increases as the number increases (for example, the CPU 103 In the processing of steps S271 and S273, a variation pattern having a higher number of pseudo-continuous variations at a higher rate than when “losing” is determined when “big hit” is determined), and the mode notification means In the variable display unit, after notifying that the display mode constituting the first display mode is set, the player operates the operation means, so that the notification is displayed in the second display mode. Special notification content changing means (for example, a portion in which the effect control CPU 120 executes the stop symbol advance effect of the stop symbol advance effect pattern TZP3-3 in the processing of step S172, etc.) for changing to the notification that it becomes an aspect is further included. Also good.
According to such a structure, after notifying that it becomes the 1st display mode (special mode), it will become the 2nd display mode (other special mode) corresponding to a player's operation. Therefore, it is possible to change the content notified by the player and improve the interest of the game.

When the operation means is operated by a player while the re-change effect execution means is informing that the special aspect notification means is in the display form constituting the first display form, The re-change effect is executed after changing to the notification that the display form constituting the second display form is made by the special notice content changing means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is shown in FIG. 66 in the process of step S172). The reach display execution means performs the notification that the special mode notification means is in the display mode constituting the first display mode, and the operation unit is not operated. In this case, the reach effect is executed after the first display mode is displayed (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the effect display shown in FIG. 67 in the process of step S172). To) may be.
According to such a configuration, since the subsequent effects change depending on whether or not the player has operated, the interest of the game is improved.

Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, variable display time determination means (for example, the CPU 103 performs steps S271, S273, S274) for determining the time from the start of variable display of the identification information to the display display of the display result. And a derivation that displays and displays the display result on the variable display means when the time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed after the variable display of the identification information has started. Display means (for example, a part for deriving and displaying the display result when the special control fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of step S172 in the processing of step S172), and the variable display time determining means is the special effect. When the execution means executes the special effect, a specific time is determined (for example, the CPU 103 performs processing in step S273). When it is determined that the variation pattern is accompanied by a reach effect or a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, a special figure variation time associated with the variation pattern is set in the process of step S274), and the special effect execution means When the non-special mode notification means is informing that the display mode does not constitute the special display mode, and the player operates the operation unit, the display mode of the plurality of variable display units is changed. The special effect is executed after the notification content changing means is changed to the notification that the display mode constituting the special display mode is set (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control in the processing of step S172 in FIGS. 57 and 59) The non-special mode notification means performs the notification that the display mode does not constitute the special display mode. When the means is not operated, after changing the display mode of the plurality of variable display parts to a display mode that does not constitute the special display mode, the special effect is changed to the display mode that constitutes the special display mode. (For example, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect display shown in FIGS. 58 and 60 in the process of step S172), and the non-special mode notifying unit configures the special display mode. When the notification indicating that the display mode is not performed is performed, the variable display time determination unit determines the variable display time determination unit after starting the variable display of the identification information regardless of whether the operation unit is operated or not. When a specific time has elapsed, the display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 stops the process of displaying a stop symbol in step S172). Regardless of whether or not there is an operation on the push button 31B in the production, the display result may be derived and displayed when the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to match the bottom of the effect time determined in advance and the content of the effect regardless of whether or not the player has operated.

Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, variable display time determination means (for example, the CPU 103 performs steps S271, S273, S274) for determining the time from the start of variable display of the identification information to the display display of the display result. And a derivation that displays and displays the display result on the variable display means when the time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed after the variable display of the identification information has started. Display means (for example, a part for deriving and displaying the display result when the special control fluctuation time has elapsed in the processing of step S172 in the processing of step S172), and the variable display time determining means is the special effect. When the execution means executes the special effect, a specific time is determined (for example, the CPU 103 performs processing in step S273). When it is determined that the variation pattern is accompanied by a reach effect or a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, a special figure variation time associated with the variation pattern is set in the process of step S274), When the operation means is operated by a player while the special mode notification unit is informing that the display mode constituting the first display mode is being performed, the display mode of the plurality of variable display units Is changed to the notification that the display mode constituting the second display mode is changed by the special notification content changing unit, and the re-variation effect is executed (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control in FIG. When the special mode notification means is informing that the display mode constituting the first display mode is being performed, the operation unit is If not, the display mode of the plurality of variable display units is changed to the second display mode after the display mode is changed to the first display mode, and then the re-change effect is executed (for example, the CPU 120 for effect control). In the process of step S172, the effect display shown in FIG. 62 is executed), and the derivation display unit performs notification that the special mode notification unit becomes the display mode constituting the first display mode. When the specific time determined by the variable display time determining means has elapsed since the variable information is displayed, regardless of whether the operating means is operated or not, the variable display The display result is derived and displayed on the means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 relates to the presence or absence of an operation on the push button 31B in the stop symbol notice effect in the process of step S172). Instead, the display result may be derived and displayed when the special figure fluctuation time has elapsed).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to match the bottom of the effect time determined in advance and the content of the effect regardless of whether or not the player has operated.

The notification content changing means is a display mode that configures the special display mode to notify that the display mode does not configure the special display mode when the operation unit is operated a predetermined number of times by the player. The special notification content changing means changes the notification to the effect to the effect that the player has operated the operation means a predetermined number of times, and notifies the second notification content that the display form constituting the first display form is obtained. (For example, in the processing of step S172, the notice control symbol is displayed when the push button 31B is operated a predetermined number of times within a predetermined operation valid period in the processing of step S172. And the number of times determination means (for example, the production control CPU 120 for determining the predetermined number of times) determines the predetermined number of times based on the determination result of the prior determination means. It may further comprise a portion) of the execution.
According to such a configuration, since the number of operations necessary for changing the production varies depending on whether or not the specific gaming state is entered, it is possible to improve the player's willingness to operate the operation means, Interest is improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a side view which shows the structural example of a stick controller. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows various chance eyes. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for game counted on the main board side. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which illustrates a variation pattern classification. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a special figure display result determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a big hit classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a variation pattern classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a fluctuation pattern determination table. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the data holding area for game control. It is explanatory drawing which illustrates the random number for production | presentation counted by the production | presentation control board side. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice classification determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display type | formula notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a display type | formula notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the operation type | system | group notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the operation type | system | group notice pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of the determination table at the time of a probability change promotion effect execution. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a probability change promotion effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the list of a stop symbol notice effect pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a stop symbol notification effect execution decision table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a stop symbol notification effect pattern determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of an operation required frequency | count determination table and a notice symbol number determination table. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a design fluctuation | variation control pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a notice effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example of a probability change promotion effect control pattern. It is a figure which shows the structural example etc. of an effect control pattern. FIG. 38 is a block diagram illustrating a configuration example of an effect control data holding area. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start winning determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a jackpot end process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production setting process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a stop symbol notification effect setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the production process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control command processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of pushbutton continuous hitting. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the waiting process per special figure. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus, etc. when a change promotion effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus, etc. when a change promotion effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus, etc. when a change promotion effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus, etc. when a change promotion effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the flow of production | presentation operation | movement when a stop symbol notification production | presentation is performed. It is a figure which shows the time flow when a stop symbol notification effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus when a stop symbol notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus when a stop symbol notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus when a stop symbol notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus when a stop symbol notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus when a stop symbol notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus when a stop symbol notice effect is performed. It is a figure which shows the flow of production | presentation operation | movement when the stop symbol notification effect of a modification is performed. It is a figure which shows the time flow when the stop symbol notice effect of a modification is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus when reach production is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus when the stop symbol notice effect of a modification is performed. It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation in an image display apparatus when the stop symbol notice effect of a modification is performed.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine according to the present embodiment and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. The game board 2 is formed with a substantially circular game area surrounded by guide rails. In this game area, a game ball as a game medium is launched from a predetermined hitting ball launching device and driven.

  A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B are provided at predetermined positions of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, on the right side of the game area). Each of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B is composed of, for example, 7-segment or dot matrix LEDs (light emitting diodes). Special symbols (also referred to as “special graphics”), which are a plurality of types of identification information (special identification information) that can be displayed, are variably displayed (variable display). For example, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B each variably display a plurality of types of special symbols composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. To do. The special symbols displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B are composed of numbers indicating "0" to "9", symbols indicating "-", and the like. There is no limitation, and for example, a plurality of types of lighting patterns in which the combination of the LED to be turned on and the LED to be turned off in the 7-segment LED may be set in advance as a plurality of types of special symbols. A plurality of special symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. Hereinafter, the special symbol variably displayed by the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as "first special symbol", and the special symbol variably displayed by the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as "second special symbol". .

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or the like, and forms a display area for displaying various effect images. In the display area of the image display device 5, the first special symbol variable display by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol variable display by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special symbol game respectively correspond to the variable display. For example, in a decorative symbol display area serving as a variable display section divided into a plurality of parts such as three, decorative symbols which are a plurality of types of identification information (decorative identification information) each identifiable are variably displayed. This variable display of decorative designs is also included in the variable display game.

  As an example, “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are arranged in the display area of the image display device 5. In response to the start of either the first special symbol change by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol change by the second special symbol display device 4B in the special game, ”,“ Middle ”, and“ right ”decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the variation of decorative symbols (for example, scroll display in the vertical direction, update display by rotation, etc.) is started. Thereafter, when the fixed special symbol is stopped and displayed as a variable display result in the special symbol game, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 are displayed. Then, the finalized decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. The “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas are movable within the display area of the image display device 5 so that the decorative symbols can be displayed in a reduced or enlarged manner. May be.

  As described above, in the display area of the image display device 5, the special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In synchronization with the figure game, a variable display of a plurality of types of decorative patterns that can be identified is performed, and a fixed decorative pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed. In addition, for example, deriving and displaying various display symbols such as a special symbol and a decorative symbol means that identification information such as a decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (also referred to as a complete stop display or a final stop display) and the variable display is ended. . On the other hand, during the variable display from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern until the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed, the variation speed of the decorative pattern becomes “0”, The symbol may be displayed in a stationary state, for example, in a display state that causes slight shaking or expansion / contraction. Such a display state is also called a temporary stop display, and although the display result in the variable display is not displayed deterministically, the player can recognize that the variation of the decorative pattern due to the scroll display or the update display is not progressing. It becomes. The temporary stop display may include displaying the decorative symbols completely stopped for a time shorter than a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) without causing slight shaking or expansion / contraction.

  In the image display device 5, as the display areas to be the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, three areas may be provided so that they can be bonded or separated, or can be bonded and separated. . The display operation in the image display device 5 is controlled by the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. When the first special symbol display device 4A is executing variable display of the first special diagram, the effect control CPU 120 causes the image display device 5 to perform effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special figure is executed on the display device 4B, the effect display is executed on the image display device 5 along with the variable display, so that the progress of the game can be easily grasped.

  The decorative symbols variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R include, for example, eight types of symbols (alphanumeric characters “1” to “8” or Chinese characters). Numbers “1” to “8”, English letters “A” to “H”, eight character images related to a predetermined motif, a combination of numbers, characters or symbols and character images, etc. For example, it may be a decoration image showing a person, an animal, an object other than these, a symbol such as a character, or any other figure. In addition to these eight types of decorative symbols, a blank symbol (a symbol that does not constitute a jackpot combination) may be included. A corresponding symbol number is assigned to each of the decorative symbols. For example, symbol numbers “1” to “8” are assigned to alphanumeric characters indicating “1” to “8”, respectively. Note that the number of decorative symbols is not limited to eight, and may be any number as long as an appropriate number of combinations such as a jackpot combination or a combination that is lost can be configured (for example, seven types or nine types).

  During the change of the decorative symbol, in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right”, for example, from the smallest to the largest symbol number, sequentially from the top to the bottom. When the scrolling display is performed and the decorative symbol having the largest symbol number (for example, “8”) is displayed, the decorative symbol having the smallest symbol number (for example, “1”) is subsequently displayed. Alternatively, in at least one of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L), the symbols are scrolled from the largest symbol number to the smallest symbol symbol. When the decorative design having the smallest number is displayed, the decorative design having the largest design number may be displayed.

  In the display area of the image display device 5, a start winning storage display area 5H is arranged. In the start winning memory display area 5H, a hold memory display for displaying the variable display hold number corresponding to the special figure game (special figure hold memory number) is specified. Here, the variable display suspension corresponding to the special game is that the game ball passes through the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the second starting winning opening formed by the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B. Generated based on the start winning by entering (entering). That is, the start condition (also referred to as “execution condition”) for executing a variable display game such as a special figure game or a variable display of decorative symbols has been established, but a variable display game based on the previously established start condition is being executed. Corresponding to the established start condition when the start condition for starting the variable display game is not established due to the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit game state or the small hit game state, etc. Variable display is held.

  As an example, in the start winning memory display area 5H, from the left in order from the variable display game in which the start condition is established based on the occurrence of the start winning corresponding to each of the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening. A plurality of display parts whose display colors are changed are provided to the right. Then, when the start condition (first start condition) of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established based on the game ball passing (entering) through the first start winning opening. One of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (transparent color) (for example, the display part at the left end of the display part corresponding to the first start winning opening that is not displayed) is changed to blue display. . Also, when the start condition (second start condition) of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied based on the game ball passing (entering) through the second start winning opening. Then, one of the display parts that are normally non-displayed (for example, the leftmost display part of the display area corresponding to the non-displayed second start winning opening) is changed to red display. Thereafter, when the start condition (first start condition) for the special figure game using the first special figure is satisfied, for example, one of the display parts corresponding to the first start winning opening (for example, blue display is displayed). The display part at the right end of the display part) is returned to non-display. Further, when the start condition (second start condition) for the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, for example, one of the display parts corresponding to the second start winning opening (for example, red display). The display part at the right end of the display parts is returned to non-display.

  In the start winning memory display area 5H, a number indicating the special figure reserved memory number may be displayed so that the player or the like can recognize the special figure reserved memory number. In addition to the start winning memory display area 5H or in place of the start winning memory display area 5H, a display for displaying the number of special figure reserved memories may be provided. In the example shown in FIG. 1, together with the start winning memory display area 5H, the first hold for displaying the special figure hold memory number in an identifiable manner on the upper part of the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B. A display 25A and a second hold display 25B are provided. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first special figure hold memory number as the effective start winning ball number that has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the normal winning ball device 6A in an identifiable manner. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second special figure hold memory number as an effective start winning ball number that has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B in an identifiable manner. Each of the first hold indicator 25A and the second hold indicator 25B has a number (for example, 4) corresponding to an upper limit value (for example, “4”) in each of the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number, for example. LED).

  Thus, although the first start condition and the second start condition are satisfied, the special game started first is being executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. For this reason, when the start condition for starting the special figure game is not satisfied, variable display suspension corresponding to the special figure game occurs. For example, if the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure based on the establishment of the first start condition is not satisfied when the first start condition is satisfied, the first special figure The number of reserved memories is incremented by 1 (incremented), and the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended. In addition, when the second start condition is satisfied, if the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure based on the establishment of the second start condition is not satisfied, the second special figure The reserved memory number is incremented by 1 (incremented), and execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended. On the other hand, when the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is started, the first special figure holding memory number is decremented by 1 (decrement), and the special figure game using the second special figure is executed. Is started, the second special figure reserved memory number is decremented by 1 (decremented).

  The variable display hold memory number obtained by adding the first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number is also referred to as a total hold memory number. When simply referring to the “number of special figure hold memory”, it usually refers to a concept including any of the first special figure hold memory number, the second special figure hold memory number, and the total hold memory number. It may refer to a concept that includes the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure reserved memory number but excludes the total reserved memory number).

  In addition, in the display area of the image display device 5, special symbols variably displayed in a special symbol game executed by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B are separated from the decorative symbols. May be provided with a special symbol variable display area for display as identifiable. As an example, in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, the special symbols can be changed in the special symbol variable display area. Variation of the effect image indicating “「 ”,“ 「”, “×”, etc. corresponding to the display is started. Thereafter, in response to the fact that the special symbol variable display in the special symbol game is terminated and the confirmed special symbol is stopped, “◎” predetermined corresponding to the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol variable display area. It is only necessary to stop and display effect images such as “O” and “X”. For example, if the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is a big hit symbol, “◎” is stopped and displayed in the special symbol variable display area, and if it is a small bonus symbol, “○” is stopped and displayed as a lost symbol. In some cases, “x” may be stopped and displayed.

  Below the image display device 5, an ordinary winning ball device 6A and an ordinary variable winning ball device 6B are provided. The normal winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning opening that is always kept in a certain open state by a predetermined ball receiving member, for example. The normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B has an electric motor having a pair of movable wing pieces that are changed into a normal open state that is a vertical position and an expanded open state that is a tilt position by a solenoid 81 for a normal electric accessory shown in FIG. A tulip-shaped accessory (ordinary electric accessory) is provided to form a second start winning opening. As an example, in the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the movable wing piece is in the vertical position when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the OFF state, so that the game ball passes (enters) the second starting winning opening. It is difficult to open normally. On the other hand, in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, the game ball passes through the second start winning opening by the tilt control in which the movable blade piece is tilted when the solenoid 81 for the normal electric accessory is in the ON state ( It will be in an expanded open state that is easy to enter. In the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B, although the game ball can enter the second start winning opening even in the normal open state, there is a possibility that the game ball may enter more than in the expanded open state. You may comprise so that it may become low. Alternatively, the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B may be configured such that the game ball does not enter the second starting winning opening in the normally open state, for example, by closing the second starting winning opening.

  A game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed in the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by, for example, a first start opening switch 22A shown in FIG. A game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by, for example, a second start opening switch 22B shown in FIG. Based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the first special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the first start condition is satisfied. Based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port 22B, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls are paid out as prize balls, and the second special figure holding memory number is set to a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “ 4 ") If the following, the second start condition is satisfied. The number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the first start port switch 22A and the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the detection of the game ball by the second start port switch 22B. May be the same number or different numbers.

  A special variable winning ball device 7 is provided below the normal winning ball device 6A and the normal variable winning ball device 6B. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 for the large winning opening door shown in FIG. 3, and changes into an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Forming a mouth. As an example, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the off state, the special prize opening door closes the special prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is in the ON state, the big prize opening door opens the big winning opening. A game ball that has passed (entered) through a special winning opening formed in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is detected by, for example, a count switch 23 shown in FIG.

  Based on the detection of the game balls by the count switch 23, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. In this way, when the game ball passes (enters) through the large winning opening opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the gaming ball passes through other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening, for example. More prize balls are paid out than when passing (entering). Therefore, if the special prize winning device 7 is opened in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, the first state is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special prize winning device 7 is closed in the special variable prize winning ball device 7, the game ball cannot pass through (enter) into the special prize winning opening, and therefore, the second disadvantageous to the player. It becomes a state.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7 segments, dot matrix LEDs, and the like, like the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and a plurality of types of identification information different from the special symbols. Is displayed (variably displayed) in a variable manner. Such variable display of normal symbols is called a general game (also referred to as “normal game”). The normal symbol display 20 variably displays, for example, a plurality of types of normal symbols composed of numbers indicating “0” to “9”, symbols indicating “−”, and the like. A plurality of types of normal symbols are assigned symbol numbers corresponding thereto. As an example, symbol numbers “0” to “9” are assigned to numbers indicating “0” to “9”, and symbol numbers “10” are assigned to symbols indicating “−”. Just do it. The normal symbol display 20 is not limited to the one that variably displays the numbers indicating “0” to “9” or the symbols indicating “−” as normal symbols. For example, “O” and “X” are displayed. Ordinary symbols are variably displayed by alternately lighting the decorative lamps (or LEDs) to be displayed, or by lighting a plurality of decorative lamps (or LEDs) such as “left”, “middle”, and “right” in a predetermined order. It may be a thing. Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general-purpose hold indicator 25C includes, for example, four LEDs, and displays the general-purpose hold storage number as the number of effective passing balls that have passed through the passing gate 41.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In addition, as a winning opening different from the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the large winning opening, for example, one or a plurality of general winning openings that are always kept open by a predetermined ball receiving member are provided. May be. In this case, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls may be paid out as a prize ball based on the fact that a game ball that has entered one of the general prize openings is detected by a predetermined general prize ball switch. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken. Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the left and right upper positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a game effect lamp 9 is provided at the periphery of the game area. A decorative LED may be arranged around each structure (for example, the normal winning ball device 6A, the normal variable winning ball device 6B, the special variable winning ball device 7, etc.) in the game area of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) operated by a player or the like to launch a game ball as a game medium toward the game area. For example, the hitting operation handle adjusts the resilience of the game ball according to the operation amount (rotation amount) by the player or the like. The hitting operation handle only needs to be provided with a single shot switch or a touch ring (touch sensor) for stopping the driving of a shooting motor included in the hitting ball shooting device. At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. )) Is provided. Below the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a lower plate that holds (stores) surplus balls overflowing from the upper plate so as to be discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  A stick controller 30 that can be held and tilted by a player is attached to a member that forms the lower plate, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower plate body (for example, a central portion of the lower plate). Yes. FIG. 2 shows a configuration example of the stick controller 30. The stick controller 30 includes an operation rod 30A held by the player, and a trigger button 31A is provided at a predetermined position of the operation rod 30A (for example, a position where the index finger of the operator is hooked when the player holds the operation rod 30A). Is provided. The trigger button 31A is used for a predetermined instruction operation by performing a push-pull operation with a predetermined operation finger (for example, index finger) while the player holds the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 with an operation hand (for example, the left hand). What is necessary is just to be comprised so that. A trigger sensor 35A (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instruction operation by a push-pull operation on the trigger button 31A or the like may be built in the operation rod 30A. A tilt direction sensor unit 32 that detects a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A may be provided inside the main body of the lower plate at the lower part of the stick controller 30. For example, the tilt direction sensor unit 32 includes two transmissive photosensors arranged in parallel to the board surface of the game board 2 on the left side of the center position of the operation rod 30A when viewed from the player's side facing the pachinko gaming machine 1. 4) combining a parallel sensor pair) and two transmission photosensors (vertical sensor pair) arranged perpendicularly to the board surface of the game board 2 on the right side of the center position of the operating rod 30A when viewed from the player side. What is necessary is just to be comprised including the two transmission type photosensors. In addition, the attachment position of the stick controller 30 in a lower plate is not limited to the center part of a lower plate, The position approached to either the right or left may be sufficient.

  The member that forms the upper plate includes, for example, a push button 31B that allows a player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 30). Is provided. The push button 31B only needs to be configured to be able to detect a predetermined instruction operation such as a pressing operation from a player mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically. A push sensor 35 </ b> B (see FIG. 3) that detects a player's operation act on the push button 31 </ b> B may be provided inside the upper plate body at the position where the push button 31 </ b> B is installed. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the push button 31 </ b> B and the stick controller 30 are attached in the vertical position in the center portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, it is good also considering the attachment position of push button 31B and the stick controller 30 as the position which moved to either the right or left in an upper plate and a lower plate, maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the mounting position of the push button 31B and the stick controller 30 is not in a vertical positional relationship, but may be in a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  The trigger button 31A provided on the stick controller 30 is configured such that an instruction operation can be performed by performing a push / pull operation with an operating finger while the player holds the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 with an operating hand. ing. On the other hand, the push button 31B is provided at a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 that forms the upper plate separately from the stick controller 30, and the player does not hold the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. In FIG. 2, the instruction operation can be performed by pressing the operation hand. Therefore, the trigger button 31A is difficult to perform a continuous hitting operation that is a continuous instruction operation compared to the push button 31B.

  In the normal game by the normal symbol display 20, the normal symbol display 20 shows that the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 provided in the game area is detected by the gate switch 21 shown in FIG. After the general chart start condition for executing variable display is established, based on the fact that the general chart start condition for starting variable display of normal symbols, such as the end of the previous general chart game, is established, Be started. In this normal game, after the normal symbol change is started, when a predetermined time as the normal symbol change time elapses, the fixed normal symbol that is a variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). At this time, if a specific normal symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol), such as a number indicating “7”, is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbol per symbol such as a number or symbol other than the number indicating “7” is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the variable symbol display result of the normal symbol is “ordinary loss”. Become. Corresponding to the fact that the normal symbol variable display result is “per standard”, the expansion / release control (tilt control) is performed in which the movable tulip of the electric tulip constituting the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B is tilted. The normal opening control is performed to return to the vertical position when a predetermined time has elapsed.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A, the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning port formed in the normal winning ball device 6A is detected by the first start port switch 22A shown in FIG. After the first start condition is established due to the above, it is started based on the fact that the first start condition is established, for example, due to the end of the last special game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the special game by the second special symbol display device 4B, the game ball that has passed (entered) the second start winning port formed in the normal variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second start port switch 22B shown in FIG. After the second start condition is satisfied due to the fact that the second start condition is satisfied, for example, it is started based on the fact that the second special start game, the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has ended, for example.

  In the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B, after the special symbol variable display is started, the special symbol variable display result is obtained when a predetermined time as the special symbol variable time elapses. A definite special symbol (a special graph display result) is derived and displayed. At this time, if a specific special symbol (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it becomes a “big hit” as the specific display result, and a predetermined special symbol (small bonus symbol) different from the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed. If the special symbol different from the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the result is “lost”. After the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the game is controlled to the big hit gaming state as a specific gaming state in which a round advantageous to the player (also referred to as “round game”) is executed a predetermined number of times. Further, after the variable display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit game state different from the big hit game state.

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment, as an example, the special symbol indicating the numbers “1”, “3”, and “7” is the big hit symbol, and the special symbol indicating the number “2” is the small hit symbol. , The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is a lost symbol. It should be noted that each symbol such as a big win symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lose symbol in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A is different from each symbol in the special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B. Alternatively, a special symbol common to both special symbol games may be a big hit symbol, a small bonus symbol, or a lost symbol.

  Of the special symbols that show the numbers "1", "3", and "7" that will be jackpot symbols, the special symbols that show the numbers "3" and "7" will be the 15 round jackpot symbol, and the number "1" The special symbol shown will be a two-round jackpot symbol. In the big hit gaming state (15 round big hit state) as a multi-round specific game state controlled after the 15 round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special prize winning ball door of the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is controlled. However, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened by opening the large winning opening in a predetermined period (for example, 29 seconds) which is the first period or a period until a predetermined number (for example, 9) of winning balls are generated. Is changed to a first state (open state) advantageous to the player. In this way, the special prize opening door that has opened the special prize opening during the round is received a special ball, which receives the game ball falling on the surface of the game board 2 and then closes the special prize opening. The device 7 is changed to a second state (closed state) disadvantageous to the player, and one round is completed. In the 15 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round, which is the open cycle of the big prize opening, becomes the first round number (for example, “15”). A game in the 15 round big hit state in which the number of round executions is “15” is also referred to as a 15-time open game. In such a 15-round big hit state, every time a game ball wins a big winning opening 60, 15 balls (prize balls) are obtained. The 15 round round big hit state is also referred to as a first specific gaming state.

  In the big hit gaming state (two round big hit state) as a small round specific gaming state controlled after the two round big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is played in each round. The second period (for example, 0.5 seconds) in which the period for changing to the first state advantageous to the player (the period in which the grand prize opening is opened by the grand prize opening door) is shorter than the first period in the 15 round big hit state It becomes. In the 2 round big hit state, the number of executions of the round becomes a second round number (for example, “2”) smaller than the first round number in the 15 round big hit state. Note that in the 2 round big hit state, it is only necessary to control the number of executions of the round to be the second round number, and other control may be performed in the same manner as the 15 round big hit state. A game in the round two big hit state in which the number of round executions is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game. In the two-round big hit state, in a predetermined winning ball apparatus provided separately from the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 in each round, by changing a predetermined winning opening serving as a big winning opening from a closed state to an open state, etc. The second state that is disadvantageous to the player may be changed to the first state that is advantageous to the player, and the state may be returned to the second state after a predetermined period (the first period or the second period) has elapsed.

  In such a two-round big hit state, 15 game balls (prize balls) can be obtained if a game ball wins a big winning opening, but the opening period of the big winning opening is the second period (0.5 seconds). It is very short. Therefore, the two-round big hit state is a big hit gaming state in which a ball (prize ball) cannot be obtained substantially. The 2 round big hit state is also referred to as a second specific gaming state. In addition, the big hit gaming state as the low round specific gaming state is not limited to the number of round execution times compared to the big hit gaming state as the multiple round specific gaming state. For example, the round execution number is small round specific gaming state. While the state and the multi-round specific gaming state are the same, in the small-round specific gaming state, the upper limit period (for example, 2 seconds) for opening the big prize opening is the upper limit period for the multi-round specific gaming state (for example, 29 seconds) ) May be shorter. That is, the big hit gaming state as the small round specific gaming state is that the period in which the big prize opening is changed to the open state in each round is a second period shorter than the first period in the multi-round specific gaming state, The number of executions may be at least one of the second round numbers less than the first round number in the multi-round specific gaming state.

  Further, among the special symbols indicating the numbers “3” and “7” which are the big hit symbols of 15 rounds, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special game 15 After the round big hit state is over, as one of the special game states, time reduction control (time reduction control) in which the variable symbol variable display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game is shortened compared to the normal state. Controlled to short state when done. Here, the normal state is a normal game state as a game state different from a specific game state such as a big hit game state, a probability change state, and a short time state, and an initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, a system reset is performed). As in the case where the initialization process is performed after the power is turned on, the same control is performed. If the time-short state is terminated when any of the conditions of the special game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) and the variable display result is “big hit” is satisfied first, Good. Like the special symbol indicating the number “3”, the 15-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to the short-time state after the jackpot gaming state based on the fact that it is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is not probable. It is called a jackpot symbol (also called “normal jackpot symbol”). Further, the fact that the non-probability variable big hit symbol out of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “15R non-probable big hit” (also referred to as “15R normal big hit”).

  Out of the special symbols that indicate the numbers of “3” and “7” that will be the big hit symbol of 15 rounds, the special symbol that shows the number of “7” is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. After the status is over, or after the 2 round jackpot state has ended based on the special symbol showing the number “1” that will be the 2 round jackpot symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special game, As one of the special game states different from the normal state, for example, the probability variation state (high probability state) in which the probability variation control (probability variation control) is continuously performed together with the short time control in which the special figure variation time is shortened compared to the normal state. Be controlled. In this probabilistic state, the variable display result of each special figure game and decorative design is improved so that the probability that the variable display result will be “big hit” and further controlled to the big hit gaming state will be higher than in the normal state and the short-time state. To do. Such a probability change state continues until the next variable display result is a “big hit”, regardless of the number of executions of the special game. Like the special symbol indicating the number “7”, the 15-round jackpot symbol that is controlled to be probable after the jackpot game state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game is It is called a symbol. Like the special symbol indicating the number “1”, the two-round big hit symbol controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state based on being stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game is a sudden big hit symbol. It is called. Further, the fact that the probability variable big hit symbol of the 15 round big hit symbols is stopped and displayed and the variable display result becomes “big hit” is called “15R probability big hit”. The fact that the sudden hit symbol is stopped and displayed and the variable display result is “big hit” is referred to as “surprise big hit” (also referred to as “2R probability variable big hit”). The 15 round jackpot symbols “3” and “7” and the 2 round jackpot symbol “1” are examples, and each jackpot symbol is not limited to these. For example, in order to prevent the player from recognizing the jackpot symbol or the type of jackpot, the jackpot symbol may not be a number but may be a predetermined symbol (for example, “co”).

  After the special symbol indicating the number “2” as the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the small hit game state is controlled. In this small hit game state, similarly to the two round big hit state, the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 performs a variable winning operation for changing the big winning opening to the first state (open state) advantageous to the player. That is, in the small hit gaming state, for example, the operation of setting the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state (open state) for the second period is repeatedly executed until the second number of times (the number of executions equal to the second round number) is reached. Is done. In the small hit gaming state, as in the two round big hit state, the period during which the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is in the first state is the second period, and the number of executions of the operation in the first state is the second. Control may be performed so that at least one of the number of times is performed. After the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state is not changed, and the game state before the variable display result becomes “small hit” is continuously controlled. However, if the number of executions of the special figure game in the special gaming state has reached a predetermined number when the special figure game with the variable display result of “small hit” is executed, after the end of the small hit gaming state, The special gaming state may end and return to the normal state. A game in the small hit gaming state in which the number of times that the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is set to the first state by the variable winning operation is “2” is also referred to as a two-time open game, similar to the game in the two round big hit state. When the winning ball device provided separately from the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round in the two round big hit state is changed to the first state, the same as the two round big hit state in the small hit gaming state. In the aspect, the winning ball apparatus may be changed to the first state.

  In the probabilistic state or the short time state, the normal symbol display unit 20 controls the normal symbol in the normal symbol game so that the variation time of the normal symbol (ordinary symbol variation time) is shorter than that in the normal state. Control for improving the probability that the display result is “per normal figure” than in the normal state, and tilt control of the movable blade piece in the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on the fact that the variable display result is “per normal figure”. The game ball can easily pass (enter) the second start winning opening, such as a control to make the tilt control time for performing longer than that in the normal state, and a control to increase the number of tilts than in the normal state. Control that is advantageous to the player is performed by increasing the possibility that the start condition is satisfied. It should be noted that any one of these controls may be performed in the probability variation state or the short time state, or a plurality of controls may be performed in combination. As described above, the control that facilitates the entry of the game ball into the second start winning opening in the probability changing state or the short-time state is also referred to as high opening control. By performing the high opening control, the frequency at which the second start winning opening becomes the expanded opening state is higher than when the high opening control is not performed. As a result, the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B can be easily established, and the special figure game can be executed frequently. In addition, the time until the variable display result becomes “big hit” is shortened. Therefore, in the probability variation state and the short time state, it becomes easier to enter the big hit gaming state than in the normal state. The period during which the high opening control can be executed is also referred to as a high opening control period, and this period may be the same as the period during which the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled to either the certain change state or the short-time state. . Further, it is also said that the gaming state is in the high base during the high opening control period. On the other hand, when it is not the high opening control period, it is said that the gaming state is in the low base. The time-short state in this embodiment is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low probability and high base state, and the normal state is a gaming state that is also referred to as a low probability and low base state.

  The probability variation state may include not only the time variation control and the high opening control performed together with the probability variation control, but also the state where only the probability variation control is performed and the time reduction control and the high opening control are not performed. As an example, after the end of the 15 round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “15R probable big hit”, the first probable state (high accuracy (Also called a high base state). After that, when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, 100 times) without the special figure display result being “big hit”, the probability variation control is continuously performed, but the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed. It is also possible to control to a second certain variation state (also referred to as a high certainty low base state) that is not performed after the completion of. In addition, after the end of the two-round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special game is “abrupt big hit” in the normal state, the state shifts to the second positive change state and only the positive change control is performed. However, the time reduction control and the high opening control may not be performed. On the other hand, after the end of the two round big hit state based on the fact that the variable display result in the special figure game is “surprise big hit” when in the probability changing state or the short time state, the state shifts to the first probability changing state, Short time control and high opening control may be performed together with the probability variation control. Alternatively, after the 15-round big hit state based on “15R probable big hit”, the control is made to the first positive change state until the special figure display result becomes “big hit” again, while the 2-round big hit state based on “surprise big hit” After the completion of, the transition to the first certain change state is made, and when the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number without the special figure display result being “big hit”, the second certain change state is entered. It may be. While the short-time control and the high-open control are started and ended simultaneously (interlocked), the start and end of the probability variation control is not necessarily linked to the start and end of the short-time control and high-open control. May be.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and In response to the start of any one of the special symbol games using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, the decorative symbol variable display is started. The period from the start of variable display of decorative symbols to the end of variable display due to the stop display of the fixed decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R Then, the variable display state of the decorative pattern may be a predetermined reach state. Here, the reach state means a decorative design (“reach” which is not yet temporarily stopped when the decorative design temporarily displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 forms a part of the jackpot combination. "Varying symbol") is a display state in which the variation continues, or a display state in which all or part of the decorative symbols change synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination is there. Specifically, in some of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R) in advance. The remaining decorative symbol display area (for example, “medium”) that has not yet been temporarily stopped when the decorative symbol (for example, the decorative symbol indicating the alphanumeric character “7”) constituting the determined jackpot combination is temporarily stopped is displayed. ) In the display state in which the decorative symbols are fluctuating, or all or part of the decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is a display state that fluctuates synchronously while constituting all or part of the jackpot combination.

  Further, in response to the reach state, the variation speed of the decorative design is reduced, or a character image (an effect image simulating a person) different from the decorative design is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. Or changing the display mode of the background image, playing and displaying a moving image that is different from the decorative design, or changing the variation mode of the decorative design, performing a different rendering operation than before reaching the reach state May be. Such effect operations such as display of the character image, change of the display mode of the background image, reproduction display of the moving image, and change of the decorative pattern change mode are referred to as reach effect display (or simply reach effect). In the reach effect, not only the display operation in the image display device 5 but also the sound output operation by the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation (flashing operation) in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9, and the like are in the reach state. An operation mode different from the previous operation mode may be included. As an effect operation in the reach effect, a plurality of types of effect patterns (also referred to as “reach patterns”) having different operation modes (reach modes) may be prepared in advance. Each reach mode has a different possibility of “big hit” (also referred to as “reliability” or “big hit reliability”). That is, it is possible to vary the possibility that the variable display result will be a “hit” depending on which of the multiple types of reach effects is executed. As an example, in this embodiment, reach modes such as normal reach, super reach α, and super reach β are preset. And, when the reach form of super reach such as super reach α and super reach β appears, the possibility that the variable display result will be “big hit” compared to the case where the reach form of normal reach appears (expected degree of big hit) Becomes higher.

  During the variable display of decorative designs, unlike the reach effect, the decorative display variable display state may become the reach state, and the variable display result may be a “hit”. There may be a case where a variable display effect for notifying the player is given by a variable display mode of the symbol or the like. In this embodiment, variable display effects such as “sliding” and “pseudo-continuous” can be executed, and each effect operation is executed in response to a change pattern being determined on the main board 11 side. Or not is determined.

  In the variable display effect of “sliding”, two or more decorative symbol display areas are displayed after changing the decorative symbols in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. After temporarily displaying the decorative symbols in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R (for example, “left” and “right”), a predetermined number (for example, “1” or “2”) decorative symbol display area (for example, one or both of the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L and the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R), and after changing the decorative symbol again, stop display. Thus, the effect display for changing the decorative design to be stopped is performed.

  In the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started in response to one of the first start condition and the second start condition of the special figure game being satisfied once. Before the final determined decorative symbol is derived and displayed, the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. The effect display in which the decorative symbols are changed again (pseudo-variable) in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R can be performed a predetermined number of times (for example, up to three times). The number of quasi-continuous fluctuations is displayed for the left, middle, and right decorative symbols, excluding the first variation after all decorative symbols are temporarily suspended after the decorative symbol variable display starts. This is the number of times that the decorative symbols re-variate in all of the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. As an example, in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a special combination pseudo as shown in FIG. 4A is displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. A decorative symbol that is one of a plurality of types of lost combinations predetermined as the consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped and displayed. Here, the “left symbol” shown in FIG. 4A or the like is a decorative symbol temporarily displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, and the “middle symbol” is a “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. The “right symbol” is a decorative symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. In the temporary stop display, while the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the decorative symbol is displayed to the player by, for example, performing a fluctuation display or changing the decorative symbol again immediately after stopping for a short time. What is necessary is just to alert | report that the decoration design which is not decided. Alternatively, even in the temporary stop display, the decorative design may be changed again after the decorative design is stopped to the extent that the player recognizes that the displayed decorative design has been confirmed.

  In the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the variable display result may be set so that the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases as the number of pseudo-continuous changes (re-changes) increases. Accordingly, the player can recognize that the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is performed by temporarily stopping display of any one of the pseudo-continuous chances GC1 to GC8, and the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations increases. Accordingly, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” is enhanced. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied once by performing the pseudo-continuous change (re-change) once to three times. Based on this, it is possible to make it appear as if the variable display of the decorative symbols has been started 2 to 4 times in succession. Note that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-variations) in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect may be executed more than one to three times, for example, four or five times.

  When the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed, a re-change effect such as a related display effect is executed along with a plurality of variable displays including the initial change (pseudo-continuous change). Also good. As an example, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation) by the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, one that is lit among a plurality of decoration LEDs provided inside or outside the game area is 1 It may be controlled to increase one by one. Further, during the period of each variation display (including the first variation), the display color of the decoration LED may be controlled to change, or the lighting LED among the plurality of decoration LEDs changes. May be controlled. As another example, an effect model (movable member) provided inside or outside the game area is operated during the period of each change display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. It may be controlled. As yet another example, the image display device 5 is controlled to display a predetermined effect image such as a specific character image during the period of each change display (including the initial change) by the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. May be. In addition to some or all of these re-variation effects, or in place of some or all of these re-change effects, lighting and blinking of decorative LEDs, operation of the effect model, display of effect images The re-variation effect may be executed by combining some or all of them. At this time, a case where a re-variation effect combining a plurality of types of effect forms is included, or a case where a re-change effect is performed multiple times, compared to a case where a re-change effect is executed with only one type of effect form. In the case where the effect mode changes, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the possibility of “15R probability variable big hit”, and the like may increase.

  The production operation executed as the re-variation production may include any production operation such as sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and lighting operation of other light emitters such as the game effect lamp 9. Also, for example, differences in the output of sound and sound effects from the speakers 8L, 8R, differences in the movement of the production target object (eg, production model, etc.) (differences in operating speed, differences in operating distance, differences in operating direction, etc.) Depending on the movement of the character image displayed on the image display device 5 (difference in movement speed, difference in movement distance, difference in movement direction, etc.) The effect mode in the re-variation effect may be made different by changing the character display instead of the image or changing the display of the background image. Further, in addition to the re-variation effect executed during the variation of the decorative symbol, for example, when the decorative symbol that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is temporarily stopped, for example, audio output from the speakers 8L, 8R, The player may be able to recognize that the chance eye has been temporarily stopped and displayed by an arbitrary production operation such as the lighting operation of the light emitter such as the effect lamp 9.

  In addition to “slip” and “pseudo ream”, variable display effects using the variable display operation of such decorative patterns include, for example, “Development chance eyes”, “Development chance eyes end”, “Slip after chance eyes stop” Various production operations such as these may be executed. Here, in the variable display effect of “Development Opportunity”, “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” from the start of the variable display of the decorative pattern to the display of the fixed decorative pattern resulting in the variable display result. In all of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the decorative symbols constituting the development chances included in the predetermined special combination are temporarily stopped and displayed, and then the decorative symbol variable display state is reached. A predetermined reach production is started. As a result, when the decorative symbol constituting the development opportunity is temporarily stopped, the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, and the variable display result becomes “big hit” after the reach state is reached. Expectation is enhanced. Further, in the variable display effect of “end of development chance”, after the decorative display variable display is started, the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are all displayed. Then, an effect display is performed in which a decorative pattern having a predetermined combination as an opportunity for development is derived and displayed as a confirmed decorative pattern. In the variable display effect of “slip after the chance stop”, as with the variable display effect of “pseudo ream”, after the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the fixed decorative pattern that is the variable display result is derived and displayed. , “Left”, “Middle”, “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are temporarily stopped temporarily for the decorative combination (special combination) that is one of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. After the display, unlike the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, the effect display that changes the decorative symbol to be stopped by changing the decorative symbol again in a part of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Is done.

  In this embodiment, the display is performed after the decorative pattern display mode in the image display device 5 becomes a special display mode such as a reach state (first display mode) or a pseudo-continuous chance (second display mode). An effect such as a reach effect or a variable display effect of a “pseudo-ream” is also called a special effect.

  During variable display of decorative designs, unlike reach display or variable display effects such as “slip” and “pseudo-run”, for example, displaying a predetermined effect image, displaying a message as an image, outputting sound, etc. As described above, there is a possibility that the variable display state of the decorative design may reach a reach state due to a presentation operation different from the variable display operation of the decorative design, and that the variable display result may be a “hit”. A notice effect may be executed to notify the player. The effect operation that becomes the notice effect is the variable display state of the decorative symbol after the decorative symbol variable display is started in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. May be executed (started) prior to the reach state (before the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. In this embodiment, display type advance notices such as “character display” and “step-up display” and operation type advance notices such as “single push button”, “single push button”, “single trigger button”, and “trike trigger button” are displayed. For example, a plurality of types of notice effects are set to be executable. An effect operation that becomes a notice effect may be any action that does not cause a change in the variable symbol display time (special figure change time) depending on whether or not it is executed.

  In the “character display” notice effect, during the variable display of the decorative pattern, for example, an effect display in which one of a plurality of types of character images prepared in advance is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed. In the “step-up display” notice effect, during the variable display of the decorative design, for example, an effect display that switches and displays a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 5. An effect operation may be performed in which the effect mode changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages. In the notice effect of “step-up display”, after any one of a plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance (for example, an effect image that is displayed first in a predetermined order) is displayed, the effect image The effect display in the notice effect may be terminated without switching. In addition, instead of the effect display for switching the effect image to be displayed, or along with such an effect display, for example, the effect mode is caused by an effect operation in which a movable member for effect is operated in a plurality of types of operation modes in a predetermined order. An effect operation that changes (steps up) in a plurality of stages may be performed.

  The notice effect that can be stepped up is a special symbol or decorative symbol that is executed in response to one start prize (that one game ball has entered the first start prize slot or the second start prize slot). Is a kind of notice effect that is executed during variable display, and is also referred to as a step-up notice effect that changes (steps up) the aspect of the notice (effect contents by display, sound, lamp, moving object, etc.) in multiple stages. The In general, the greater the number of stages (number of steps) that change, the higher the reliability (the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”). Further, depending on the number of steps in the step-up notice effect or the effect mode at each step, it becomes “15R probability variation big hit” or “2R probability variation big hit”, a specific reach effect is executed, “15R non-probable variation” Of the promotion from “big hit” to “15R probable big hit”, at least one of them may be notified in advance. Further, the object to be notified may be changed according to the number of times of change (number of steps). For example, “reach determination” may be performed when going to the second step, “super reach confirmation” when going to the third step, and “big hit confirmation” going to the fourth step. As the change of the notice mode (step-up), different character images may be displayed in order, or the step-up may be performed by changing the shape or color of one character. May be. That is, it is only necessary to be able to recognize that the state of the notice means (display, sound, lamp, movable object, etc.) as viewed from the player changes stepwise.

  In the pre-announcement effect that becomes the operation system advance notice such as “single push button”, “single push button”, “single trigger button”, and “trigger trigger button”, a predetermined effect that is a button operation promotion effect during variable display of decorative symbols The operation may be performed. In the button operation promotion effect, for example, an effect image such as a character image or a message image prepared in advance is displayed at a predetermined position in the display area of the image display device 5 to operate the push button 31B or the trigger button 31A by the player. It is only necessary to provide a production operation that prompts The effect operation that prompts the player to perform an operation is not limited to an effect that causes the image display device 5 to display an effect image. The effect that causes a predetermined sound to be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED are predetermined. The lighting pattern may be turned on or blinking, the production model provided inside or outside the game area may be operated in a predetermined operation mode, or any of these may be combined. When such a button operation promotion effect is performed, it becomes an operation effective period during which an operation action by the player is detected effectively. Then, in response to the detection of the operation action by the player within the operation effective period, for example, one of the plurality of types of effect images prepared in advance is displayed on the image display device 5, Various effect operations such as outputting sound effects corresponding to any one of the prepared voice patterns from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed.

  In the notice effect of “single push button” or “single trigger button”, a predetermined instruction operation by the player (for example, pressing operation of the push button 31B or pushing operation of the trigger button 31A) is detected once within the operation effective period. Based on this, the effect mode (effect content) in the notice effect changes. Thereafter, even if an instruction operation by the player is detected, it is only necessary to perform control so that a change in the production mode corresponding to the detection result does not occur. Alternatively, when the instruction operation by the player is detected once, the operation valid period may be ended so that the instruction operation by the player is not detected thereafter.

  In the notice effect of “push button repeated hits” or “trigger button repeat hits”, a predetermined instruction operation (for example, pressing operation of the push button 31B or pushing operation of the trigger button 31A) by the player is detected within the operation effective period. Based on the number of times and the like, the effect mode (effect content) in the notice effect changes. For example, each time an instruction operation by a player is detected, the effect mode in the notice effect is changed little by little so that the degree of change in the effect mode is varied according to the number of times the instruction operation is detected. Good. Or you may make it vary the grade which an effect | action aspect changes according to the total frequency | count of instruction | indication operation detected within predetermined time.

  Also, in the notice effect of “trigger button single shot” or “trigger button repeated hit”, the effect mode (effect contents) in the notice effect changes according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A. For example, when the tilting operation by the player is detected, the effect mode according to the display of the effect image is changed by performing display switching of the effect image corresponding to the detected tilt direction. Therefore, in the notice effect of “single trigger button” or “trigger trigger button repeated”, the effect manner in the notice effect changes according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A and the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A. On the other hand, in the notice effect of “single push button” or “push button push”, the effect aspect in the notice effect changes according to the instruction operation to the push button 31B.

  An effect operation in which the effect mode changes according to the tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and an instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A, and an effect operation in which the effect mode changes according to the instruction operation with respect to the push button 31B are: The present invention is not limited to the notice effect, but may be executed as a reach effect or a re-change effect that is executed in response to a change pattern, for example.

  In this embodiment, the display system notice such as “character display” and “step-up display” as described above, “single push button”, “push push button”, “single trigger button”, “tap trigger button” In addition to the operation-type notice such as “”, a stop symbol notice effect for notifying the ornament symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” ornament symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be executed. is there. The effect of the stop symbol notice effect is that the decorative symbol variable display is started after all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” start variable display. Anything may be executed (started) before the display state becomes the reach state (before the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R). . In addition, the notice effect that notifies that the variable display result may be a “big hit” may include one that is executed after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state.

  The stop symbol notice effect displays a notice symbol corresponding to the ornament symbol at one or more of the ornament symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". The notice symbol is composed of eight types of numbers “1” to “8” in the same manner as the decorative symbol. The notice symbol may be a number having a display mode different from the decorative symbol. For example, it is preferable that the notice symbol is easily distinguishable from the ornament symbol, for example, the color is lighter than the ornament symbol (for example, translucent) or a dotted number. Note that the notice symbol is not a number itself corresponding to the decorative symbol, but may be anything associated with the decorative symbol. For example, when a character image is used as a decorative design, the character image may be displayed.

  In the stop symbol notice effect, a decorative symbol showing the same number as the number indicated by the notice symbol is stopped and displayed in the decorative symbol display area where the notice symbol is displayed. Note that the decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed are not only the decorative symbols that are ultimately derived and displayed, but also the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped before the “slip” variable display effect is executed, Also included are those that are stopped and displayed in the middle of fluctuation, such as decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped when the variable display effect is executed. In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a stop symbol notice effect for displaying a notice symbol only in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5R or in the “left” and “right” ornament symbol display areas 5L and 5R. ing. In addition to or instead of the stop symbol announcement effect that displays the warning symbol only in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, or in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The stop symbol notice effect for displaying the notice symbol in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R may be executed.

  In the stop symbol notice effect in which the notice symbol is displayed in the “left” and “right” ornament symbol display areas 5L and 5R, if the two notice symbols indicate the same number, the player is in a reach state (first Can be notified in advance. Further, if the combination of the two notice symbols constitutes a part of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 (second display mode) as shown in FIG. 4A (for example, “left” (For example, a notice symbol indicating a number “1” is displayed in the decorative symbol display area 5L, and a notice symbol indicating a number “2” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R). It can be expected that the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect will be executed. Further, if the combination of the two notice symbols constitutes a part of the second opening chance eyes TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. 4B (for example, in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L). When a notice symbol indicating “1” is displayed and a notice symbol indicating “5” is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, etc.) It can be expected.

  Further, in the stop symbol notice effect in which the notice symbol is displayed only in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5R, when the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed in the “left” ornament symbol display area 5L, the ornament symbol and “ The player is notified in the same manner as the case where the notice symbols are displayed in the “left” and “right” ornament symbol display areas 5L and 5R by combination with the notice symbol displayed in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5R. it can. In this embodiment, in the stop symbol notice effect in which the notice symbol is displayed only in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5R, before the ornament symbol is stopped and displayed in the “left” ornament symbol display area 5L. , The notice symbol is displayed in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5R, but after the ornament symbol is stopped in the “left” ornament symbol display area 5L, the notice symbol is displayed in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5R. You may make it display.

  In this way, in the stop symbol advance notice effect, by displaying the notice symbol on the image display device 5, whether or not the display manner of the decorative symbols becomes a special display manner such as a reach state or a pseudo-continuous chance eye is determined. It is possible to give a notice (notification) whether or not a special effect such as an effect or a variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed.

  In this embodiment, after the notice symbol is displayed, a button operation promotion effect may be executed in the same manner as the operation system notice. In this case, when the push button 31B is operated a predetermined number of times, the notice symbol is changed (changed), and then the decorative symbol corresponding to the changed notice symbol is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when the push button 31B is not operated a predetermined number of times, the decorative symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is stopped and displayed without changing the notice symbol as it is.

  In this embodiment, before the stop symbol notice effect is executed, the decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R are determined in advance. Is done. When the push button 31B is not operated for a predetermined number of times in the stop symbol notice effect in which the button operation promotion effect is executed, the decoration symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is stopped and displayed. Are different from each other, so that an effect similar to the variable display effect of “slip” is executed to change the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed. By doing in this way, it is possible to make a match with a predetermined decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed. In addition, the special figure fluctuation time in one fluctuation is determined in advance. By doing in this way, regardless of whether or not the push button 31B has been operated a predetermined number of times, the special figure fluctuation time is determined. In addition, the decorative design can be stopped and displayed.

  As an example of the stop symbol notice effect in which the button operation promotion effect is executed, first, a notice symbol that does not constitute a part of the reach state or the pseudo continuous chance eyes GC1 to GC8 is displayed. Then, when the push button 31B is operated a predetermined number of times, the reach state or the notice symbol constituting a part of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is changed. By executing such a stop symbol notice effect, it becomes possible to produce an effect that makes it appear as if a reach or `` pseudo-ream '' has occurred by the player's operation, and can promote the player's operation, The fun of gaming is improved.

  In addition, a notice symbol constituting the reach state is displayed, and when the push button 31B is operated a predetermined number of times, a stop symbol notice effect that changes to a notice symbol constituting a part of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is also provided. It is executable. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-changes) increases, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases. By executing such a stop symbol notice effect, it is possible to produce an effect that increases the expectation of becoming a “hit” by the player's operation, and the player's operation can be promoted. Interest is improved.

  In this embodiment, the stop symbol notice effect as described above is executed. However, in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, special decorative symbols (for example, “1” to “8” other than numbers) are displayed. In a game machine in which a “pseudo-ream” is executed in response to the display of a symbol or the like, or a game machine that is a “big hit (surprise)”, only the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C has a notice symbol. A stop symbol notice effect may be executed. Then, in the stop symbol notice effect that executes the button operation promotion effect, a push symbol is displayed after displaying a notice symbol indicating any number from “1” to “8” in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. When 31B is operated a predetermined number of times, the notice symbol indicating the number may be changed to a special decorative symbol.

  In this embodiment, in the stop symbol notice effect, the push button 31B is used as an operation means, but the stop symbol notice effect that uses the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or the trigger button 31A is executed. You may do it.

  If a special symbol that will be a lost symbol is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game, the decorative symbol variable display state will not reach the reach state after the variable symbol variable display starts. There are cases in which a fixed decorative symbol that is a non-reach combination is stopped and displayed. Such a decorative display variable display mode is referred to as “non-reach” (also referred to as “unreach loss”) variable display mode when the variable display result is “losing”.

  When a special symbol that becomes a losing symbol is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, it corresponds to the fact that the decorative symbol variable display state has reached the reach state after the decorative symbol variable display has started. Then, after the reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative pattern that becomes a predetermined reach combination (also referred to as reach lose combination) may be stopped and displayed. Such a variable display result of the decorative design is referred to as a variable display mode of “reach” (also referred to as “reach lose”) when the variable display result is “losing”. Note that the fixed decorative pattern that is a non-reach combination and the fixed decorative pattern that is a reach combination are collectively referred to as a fixed decorative pattern of a lost combination (non-specific combination).

  When the special symbol indicating the number “3”, which is a non-probable variable jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special symbol game as a 15-round jackpot symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is changed. Corresponding to the reach state, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a definite decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined non-probable variation big hit combination (also referred to as “normal big hit combination”) is stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbols that are non-probable big hit combinations are, for example, symbol numbers that are variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative symbols “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative symbols whose symbol numbers are an even number “2”, “4”, “6”, “8” is “left”, “middle”, What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having the even number “2”, “4”, “6”, and “8” constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination are referred to as non-probable variation symbols (also referred to as “normal symbols”). . Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming an uncertain variable big hit symbol, after the predetermined reach effect is executed, the fixed decorative symbol of the non-probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed. The variable display mode is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “non-probable change” (also referred to as “normal jackpot”) when the variable display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “non-probability change”, the game is controlled to the 15 round big hit gaming state, and when the 15 round big hit state is finished, the short time state is controlled.

  When the special symbol indicating the number “7”, which is the probability variable big hit symbol, is stopped and displayed as a special symbol to be confirmed in the special figure game as a 15-round big hit symbol, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is reached. Corresponding to the situation, after reaching the same reach effect as when the jackpot type is "non-probable change", or the reach effect different from when the jackpot type is "non-probable change" For example, after the process is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined probability variation jackpot combination may be stopped and displayed. Here, the confirmed decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination has, for example, a symbol number variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. Among the decorative patterns of “1” to “8”, any one of the decorative patterns having the odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, “7” is “left”, “middle”, “ What is necessary is just to be able to be stopped and displayed on a predetermined effective line in the “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In this way, the decorative symbols having odd numbers “1”, “3”, “5”, and “7” constituting the probability variation big hit combination are referred to as probability variation symbols. Then, in response to the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becoming a probable big hit symbol, after the reach effect is executed, the decorative display variable display mode in which the definite decorative combination of the probable big hit combination is stopped is displayed. This is referred to as a variable display mode of “probability change” (also referred to as a big hit type) when the variable display result is “big hit”.

  When the probability variable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable variable big hit combination may be stopped and displayed as a variable display result of the decorative symbol. In this way, even when the fixed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed, if the probable big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as a fixed special symbol in the special figure game, it is included in the variable display mode of “probable change”. . Thus, after the variable display result becomes “big hit” by the variable display mode of “probability change”, it is controlled to the 15 round big hit state, and when the 15 round big hit state ends, it is controlled to the positive change state. The confirmed decorative symbol that is a non-probable big hit combination and the definite decorative symbol that is a probable big hit combination are also collectively referred to as a definitive decorative symbol of a big winning combination (specific combination).

  During the variable display of the decorative symbol in which the confirmed decorative symbol is a non-probable variation jackpot combination or a certain variation jackpot combination, a re-lottery effect may be executed as a kind of certain variation promotion effect. In the re-lottery effect, after the decorative symbols that are the non-probable big hit combinations are temporarily stopped and displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5, for example, “ In the left, middle, and right decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, the same decorative pattern is changed again, and the decorative pattern (probable variable pattern) that is a combination of the probabilistic big hit and non-variable is displayed. One of the decorative symbols (non-probable variable symbols) that is a probable big hit combination is stopped and displayed as a final decorative symbol (final stop display). Here, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “non-probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes the non-probable big hit combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped display decorative pattern A change promotion promotion effect that derives and displays a symbol is performed. On the other hand, when the re-lottery effect is executed when the big hit type is “probable change”, as the re-lottery effect, the confirmed decoration that becomes a probable big hit combination after re-changing the temporarily stopped display of the decorative symbols A changing promotion success effect during stop display of the symbol may be executed, or a changing promotion failure effect during change may be executed. Such a re-lottery effect including a changing promotion failure effect and a changing promotion success effect is also referred to as a changing promotion effect.

  After the definitive decorative symbol that is a non-probable jackpot combination is derived and displayed, at the start of the jackpot gaming state or during execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state, the next round will start after any round ends in the jackpot gaming state During the big hit that becomes a notification effect as to whether or not to control to the probable change state in the period until the start, the period from the end of the last round in the big hit gaming state to the start of the next variable display game, etc. A promotion effect may be executed. Note that a notification effect similar to the jackpot promotion effect may be executed during the first variable display game after the end of the jackpot gaming state. The jackpot promotion effect that is executed after the final round in the jackpot game state is particularly called “ending promotion effect”. Such a jackpot promotion effect is also a kind of probable promotion effect.

  In the jackpot promotion effect, there is no jackpot promotion success effect informing that there is a promotion in which the game state becomes a probabilistic state even though the confirmed decoration pattern is a non-probable big hit combination, and there is no promotion in a promiscuous state There is a promotion promotion failure during jackpot. For example, in the jackpot promotion effect, the decorative symbol is variably displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 and either the non-probable variable symbol or the probable variable symbol is stopped and displayed as the effect display result, or the decorative symbol variable display What is necessary is just to alert | report so that a player can recognize the presence or absence of the promotion which will be in a probability change state by displaying the effect image different from.

  As such fluctuating promotion effects and jackpot promotion effects, for example, one of a plurality of types of probable promotion effects such as “single push button”, “push push button”, “single trigger button”, “trigger trigger button” is selected. May be set to be executable. That is, an effect operation in which the effect mode changes in accordance with the tilting operation on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A, or an effect operation in which the effect mode changes in response to an instruction operation on the push button 31B, It may be executed as a promotion effect during change or a promotion effect during jackpot.

  As a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, a special symbol indicating the number “1” which is a two-round big hit symbol is stopped or displayed, or a special symbol indicating the number “2” which is a small hit symbol is stopped and displayed. In such a case, the variable display state of the decorative symbols does not reach the reach state. For example, a combination of a plurality of types of fixed decorative symbols predetermined as the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 as shown in FIG. One of the above may be stopped. In addition, when the special symbol indicating the number “1”, which is a two-round jackpot symbol, is stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special symbol game, the variable symbol display state of the decorative symbol is changed to the reach state. Then, after a predetermined reach effect is executed, a fixed decorative symbol that becomes a predetermined reach combination may be stopped and displayed. Corresponding to the fact that the confirmed special symbol in the special figure game becomes a special symbol indicating the number of “1” which is a two-round jackpot symbol, the variable display mode of the decorative symbols in which various fixed ornament symbols are stopped and displayed is variable. This is referred to as a variable display mode (also referred to as a jackpot type) of “surprise accuracy” (also referred to as “surprising accuracy hit” or “sudden probability change big hit”) when the display result is “big hit”. Thus, after the variable display result is “big hit” by the variable display mode of “surprise accuracy”, it is controlled to the two round big hit state, and when the two round big hit state is finished, it is controlled to the probability changing state.

  When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “accuracy”, the accuracy mode start effect may be executed during variable display of the decorative symbols. In the surprise mode start effect, a predetermined effect operation is performed in response to the big hit type being “Accuracy”. After the surprise mode start effect is performed, an effect mode different from the normal effect mode called the accuracy mode may be started. In addition, the random mode start effect is not limited to the effect operation that is executed during the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols, and continues from the variable display even during part or all of the period of the two round big hit state. An effect operation may be performed. When the suddenness mode start effect is started, the decorative symbol that is variably displayed may be deleted, and after the suddenness mode start effect is executed, the confirmed decorative symbol may not be derived and displayed. In the sudden accuracy mode, for example, until the variable display result is “big hit” and the probability variation state ends, the effect in the sudden accuracy mode is performed. In the effect in the sudden accuracy mode, the display mode of the background image in the display area of the image display device 5 is different from the display mode in the normal rendering mode, and is output from the speakers 8L and 8R in accordance with the variable display of the decorative pattern. The sound to be different from the sound in the normal effect mode, the lighting pattern of the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED to be different from the lighting pattern in the normal effect mode, or a part of these Alternatively, by combining all of them, it may be informed so that the player can recognize that the mode is inaccuracy.

  In the probability variation state, for example, an effect image for notifying that the probability variation state is “being probability variation” is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, or the background image or the decorative pattern display mode in the display region of the image display device 5 is displayed. May be different from the display mode in the normal effect mode, for example, so that the player can recognize that the player is in the probability change state. Alternatively, in the probability variation state, for example, the player may be unable to recognize or difficult to recognize that it is in the probability variation state by becoming the same production mode as in the normal state or the short time state (so-called latent probability variation). . It can be said that during the period in which such a latent probability change is performed, the gaming state is in the latent probability change.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is equipped with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, and a lamp control board 14 as shown in FIG. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also equipped with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and an interface board are disposed on the back surface of the game board 2 in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a main-side control board on which various circuits for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 performs on / off control of each LED (for example, segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and thereby the first special diagram and the second special diagram. Variable display of a predetermined display pattern such as controlling the variable display of the normal symbol display 20 or controlling the variable symbol display of the normal symbol display 20 by controlling the lighting / extinction / coloring control of the normal symbol display 20. It also has a function to control. The main board 11 includes, for example, a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110 that receives detection signals from various switches for game ball detection and transmits the detection signals to the game control microcomputer 100, and the game control microcomputer 100. A solenoid circuit 111 for transmitting a solenoid drive signal to the solenoids 81 and 82 is mounted.

  The effect control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives the control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, and receives the image display device 5, the speakers 8L, 8R. In addition, various circuits for controlling the production operation by the electrical parts for production such as the game effect lamp 9 are mounted. That is, the effect control board 12 provides effects such as the display operation in the image display device 5, all or part of the sound output operation from the speakers 8 </ b> L and 8 </ b> R, and all or part of the on / off operation in the game effect lamp 9. A function of determining the control content for causing the electrical component to execute a predetermined performance operation is provided.

  The sound control board 13 is a control board for sound output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. For example, a processing circuit for executing audio signal processing is mounted. The lamp control board 14 is a control board for lamp output control provided separately from the effect control board 12, and is turned on / off in the game effect lamp 9 and the like based on commands and control data from the effect control board 12. A lamp driver circuit for driving is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the main board 11 is connected to wiring for transmitting detection signals from the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22 </ b> A, the second start port switch 22 </ b> B, and the count switch 23. The gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 have an arbitrary configuration that can detect a game ball as a game medium, such as a sensor. What is necessary is just to have. In addition, the main board 11 includes a first special symbol display device 4A, a second special symbol display device 4B, a normal symbol display device 20, a first hold display device 25A, a second hold display device 25B, and a general drawing hold display device 25C. Wiring for transmitting a command signal for performing display control such as is connected.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The main board 11 is provided with a main board side connector corresponding to, for example, the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is connected between the main board side connector and the game control microcomputer 100. The output buffer circuit can pass a signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15, and prevents the signal input from the relay board 15 to the main board 11. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 or the relay board 15 side to the main board 11 side.

  The relay board 15 only needs to be provided with a transmission direction regulation circuit for each wiring for transmitting a control signal from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12, for example. Each transmission direction regulation circuit includes a diode having an anode connected to the main board connector corresponding to the main board 11 and a cathode connected to the presentation control board connector corresponding to the presentation control board 12, and one end connected to the cathode of the diode. And a resistor having the other end connected to the ground (GND). With this configuration, each transmission direction regulating circuit can prevent the signal from being input from the effect control board 12 to the relay board 15 and pass the signal only in the direction from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. Therefore, there is no room for signals to be transmitted from the production control board 12 side to the main board 11 side. In this embodiment, a transmission direction regulating circuit is provided for each wiring for transmitting a control signal in the relay board 15, and an output buffer circuit is provided between the game control microcomputer 100 and the main board side connector on the main board 11. By providing this, it is possible to prevent an illegal signal from being input to the main board 11 from the outside.

  The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control command includes, for example, a display control command used for controlling an image display operation in the image display device 5, a voice control command used for controlling sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And a lamp control command used for controlling the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like. FIG. 5A is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of the effect control command used in this embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. Note that the command form shown in FIG. 5A is an example, and other command forms may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 5A, a command 8001H is a first change start command for designating start of change in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decoration symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  In this embodiment, the first and second variation start commands and the variation pattern designation command are prepared as separate production control commands. On the other hand, the designation content indicating which of the first special figure and the second special figure is to be changed and the designated content of the fluctuation pattern are configured to be specified by one effect control command. Also good. As an example, an effect control command in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a special symbol (first special figure or second special figure) that starts change and a change pattern is prepared. You may enable it to specify the special symbol and fluctuation pattern which become a fluctuation start. Here, when the special symbol and the variation pattern that start the variation can be specified by one effect control command, the special symbol (the first special feature that starts the variation) for one variation pattern. There are cases where it is necessary to prepare two types of effect control commands according to the figure or the second special figure. On the other hand, if an effect control command for designating a special symbol for starting variation and an effect control command for designating a variation pattern are prepared separately, two types of effect control commands corresponding to the special symbol for starting variation are prepared. And the number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types of variation patterns may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  Command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command for designating a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 5 (B), the prior determination result of whether the variable display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”, and the variable display result is Different EXT data is set according to the big hit type determination result of whether the variable symbol display mode (hit type) is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” Is done. More specifically, the command 8C00H is a first variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result indicating that the variable display result is “lost”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable change”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result notification command indicating a pre-determined result and a big hit type determination result that the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result notification command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  In this embodiment, the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result notification command are prepared as separate presentation control commands. On the other hand, the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command and the variable display result indicated in the variable display result notification command may be configured to be specified by one effect control command. As an example, an effect in which EXT data is set corresponding to a combination of a variation pattern and a variable display result (any one of “losing”, “big hit”, “small hit”, and a big hit type in the case of “big hit”). A control command may be prepared, and information that can specify the variation pattern and the variable display result may be transmitted by the effect control command. Alternatively, the variation pattern and the variable display result may be specified by three or more effect control commands. Here, when the variation pattern and the variable display result are configured to be specified by a single effect control command, a plurality of types of effects corresponding to a plurality of types of variable display results for one variation pattern. You may need to provide control commands. On the other hand, if the production control command for designating the variation pattern and the production control command for notifying the variable display result are prepared separately, the number of production control commands corresponding to the number of types of the variation pattern and the variable display result are provided. The number of effect control commands corresponding to the number of types may be prepared, and the types of commands prepared in advance, the storage capacity of the command table, and the like can be reduced.

  The command 8F00H is a decorative symbol stop command for designating stop of variable display of decorative symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set corresponding to whether the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the normal state, the probability variation state, or the time-short state. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is a normal state, and the command 9501H is a highly accurate and high-speed control in which the gaming state is a probabilistic state and time-shortening control or high opening control is performed. The second gaming state designation command corresponding to the state, and the command 9502H is the third gaming state designation command corresponding to the high probability low base state (latency probability changing) in which the gaming state is the probability changing state and the time-shortening control or the high opening control is not performed. And the command 9503H may be a fourth gaming state designation command corresponding to the case where the gaming state is the short-time state.

  In this embodiment, a decoration symbol stop command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 as an effect control command for designating stop of variable display of the decoration symbol. On the other hand, the decorative symbol stop command may not be transmitted. In this case, on the side of the production control board 12, the special figure variation time corresponding to the variation pattern indicated in the variation pattern designation command is specified, and the first variation start command and the second variation start command are received. When the elapsed time reaches the specified special figure variation time, a setting for ending the effect executed corresponding to the special game is performed without receiving an effect control command from the main board 11. You can make it.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) that designates display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state. In the hit start designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result or the big hit type determined result. Alternatively, in the hit start designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the corresponding relationship in the variable display result notification command.

  The command A1XXH is a big winning opening releasing notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is a period in the big winning gaming state or the small winning gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after opening the big winning opening that notifies that the big winning opening has changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. With the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening or the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, the number of executions of rounds (for example, “1” to “15”) in the 15 round big hit state, or the big winning in the 2 round big hit state or the variable winning operation Different EXT data is set corresponding to the number of times the mouth is opened (for example, “1” or “2”). In the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, regardless of whether the big winning opening is in the open state or the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state, Alternatively, a continuous performance operation may be executed from the start time of the small hit game state or from the start time of variable display of the decorative symbols to the end time of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Or, in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state, depending on whether it is a period in which the big prize opening is in an open state or a period in which the big prize opening is changed from an open state to a closed state, different performance operations May be executed.

  The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of an effect image at the end of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. In the winning end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result notification command or the winning start designation command is set, so that different EXT data is set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result notification command or the hit start designation command. . In addition, when controlled to the two round big hit state and / or small hit game state, some or all of the hit start designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, the big prize opening opening designation command, and the winning end designation command are all or part of Instead of being transmitted, an effect operation may be executed during the two round big hit state and / or during the small hit game state according to the fluctuation pattern indicated in the fluctuation pattern designation command.

  The command B100H is a first special symbol display based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning is generated. This is a first start slot winning designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the device 4A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) through the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning has occurred. This is a second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the display device 4B is established.

  The command C0XXH displays the first special figure reserved memory number and the second special figure in order to display the special figure reserved memory number in the start winning memory display area 5H provided in the display area of the image display device 5 in an identifiable manner. This is a special figure reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number which is the total value with the reserved memory number. The special figure hold memory number notification command is executed when, for example, either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or the special start game is executed when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied. Corresponding to the start or the like, following the transmission of either the first start opening prize designation command or the second start opening prize designation command, the main board 11 sends it to the effect control board 12. The In the special figure hold memory number notification command, for example, the total number of hold data (for example, “0” to “8”) of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B shown in FIG. ), Different EXT data is set. As a result, on the side of the production control board 12, when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, or when either the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied, the special game is executed. Is received, the special figure hold storage number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 is received, and the total storage of the hold data in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A and the second special figure hold storage unit 151B is received. The number can be specified.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program, fixed data, and the like, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a control program by executing a game control program, and updates numeric data indicating random values independently of the CPU 103 A random number circuit 104 to perform and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105 are provided. As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, the CPU 103 reads out fixed data from the ROM 101, the CPU 103 writes various fluctuation data in the RAM 102, temporarily stores the fluctuation data, and the CPU 103 temporarily stores various fluctuation data in the RAM 102. The CPU 103 receives the input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and the CPU 103 goes outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. A transmission operation for outputting various signals is also performed. The one-chip microcomputer constituting the game control microcomputer 100 may include at least the RAM 103 in addition to the CPU 103, and the ROM 101 may be external or internal. Further, the random number circuit 104 and the I / O 105 may be externally attached.

  As described above, in the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the game control program stored in the ROM 101 to perform the game control. In other words, the processing means that the CPU 103 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another board different from the main board 11.

  In the main board 11, for example, the random number circuit 104 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. FIG. 6 is an explanatory view illustrating random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, on the side of the main board 11, a random value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type, Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern and the random value MR5 for determining the normal display result are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used.

  Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers. The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating all or part of these random number values MR1 to MR5. For example, the CPU 103 uses a random counter different from the random number circuit 104 such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 shown in FIG. Numerical data indicating a part of MR5 may be counted. As an example, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is updated independently of the CPU 103 by the random number circuit 104, and the numerical data indicating the other random number values MR2 to MR5 is updated by the CPU 103 using the random counter. It may be updated by software using Also, by executing predetermined processing such as scramble processing and arithmetic processing using all or part of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104, numerical data indicating all or part of the random number values MR1 to MR5 is obtained. It may be updated.

  The game control microcomputer 100 may have a function of setting an initial value of numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. For example, a predetermined calculation is performed using the ID number of the game control microcomputer 100 stored in a predetermined storage area such as the ROM 101 (an ID number assigned with a different value for each product of the game control microcomputer 100). The numerical data obtained by the setting is set as the initial value of the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104. By performing such processing, the randomness of the random number generated by the random number circuit 104 can be further improved.

  The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the jackpot gaming state with the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65535”. The random number MR2 for determining the jackpot type determines the jackpot type, which is the variable display mode of the decorative symbol when the variable display result is “big hit”, as one of “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type is a random value used to determine the variation pattern type in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” A value in the range of “251” is taken. The random number MR4 for determining the variation pattern is a random value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”. The random value MR5 for determining the general-purpose display result is used for determining whether the variable display result in the general-purpose game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per-normal” or “unusual for general-purpose”. For example, it takes a value in the range of “3” to “13”. That is, the random number value MR5 for determining the normal game display result is a state in which it is difficult for the game ball to pass (enter) through the second start winning port formed by the normally variable winning ball device 6B based on the variable display result in the normal game ( This is used to determine whether or not to change from a normal open state to a state where the game ball easily passes (enters) (expanded open state).

  FIG. 7 shows a variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, among the cases where the variable display result is “losing”, the variable display mode of the decorative design is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively. When the display result is “big hit”, when the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” or “surprise change”, or when the variable display result is “small hit” Correspondingly, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” is called a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach loss variation pattern”) and is variable. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the display result is “losing” and the decorative symbol variable display mode is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit” is referred to as a hit variation pattern.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in this embodiment, as non-reach fluctuation patterns, fluctuation patterns PA1-1 to PA1-5, fluctuation patterns PB1-1 and fluctuation patterns PB1-2 are prepared in advance. Yes. Further, as the reach variation pattern, variation pattern PA2-1, variation pattern PA2-2, variation pattern PB2-1, variation pattern PB2-2, variation pattern PA3-1, variation pattern PA3-2, variation pattern PB3-1, variation A pattern PB3-2 is prepared in advance. The hit fluctuation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change” include the change pattern PA4-1, change pattern PA4-2, change pattern PB4-1, change A pattern PB4-2, a fluctuation pattern PA5-1, a fluctuation pattern PA5-2, a fluctuation pattern PB5-1, and a fluctuation pattern PB5-2 are prepared in advance. As variation patterns corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are the variation patterns. Are prepared in advance. Further, a fluctuation pattern PC1-4 and a fluctuation pattern PC1-5 are prepared in advance as hit fluctuation patterns corresponding only to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”.

  FIG. 8 shows the variation pattern type in this embodiment. Each variation pattern shown in FIG. 7 is included in at least one variation pattern type among the plurality of variation pattern types shown in FIG. That is, each variation pattern type may be configured to include one or a plurality of variation patterns classified (grouped) based on, for example, an effect operation performed during variable display of decorative symbols. As an example, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which a variable display state of a decorative design does not become a reach state by classifying (grouping) a plurality of variation patterns according to the type of reach effect (effect mode), and a variation with normal reach What is necessary is just to divide into the fluctuation pattern classification in which the pattern is included, and the fluctuation pattern classification in which the fluctuation pattern with a super reach (super reach α or super reach β) is included. As another example, categorizing (grouping) multiple variation patterns according to the presence or absence of “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects and the number of executions of pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) to execute “pseudo-continuous” variable display effects A variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern that is not included, a variation pattern type that includes a variation pattern in which the number of executions of the pseudo-continuous variation (re-variation) is 1 in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, and “pseudo-continuous” What is necessary is just to divide into the variation pattern classification in which the variation pattern which makes the frequency | count of execution of a pseudo | simulation continuous variation (revariation) 2 or more is included in the variable display effect of this. As yet another example, a plurality of variation patterns may be classified (grouped) according to the presence or absence of variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip”, or the variable display time of decorative symbols. Among the plurality of variation pattern types, there may be one configured to include a common variation pattern.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-6 are prepared in advance corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. Yes. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “reach”, the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the variable display result (big hit type) of “big hit” when the variable display result is “big hit”, the variable pattern type CA 3-1 to the variable pattern type CA 3-3 are prepared in advance. Corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit” and the variable display mode (big hit type) of “surprise” or the variable display result is “small hit”, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is prepared in advance. ing. Furthermore, the variation pattern type CA4-2 is prepared in advance only in the case where the variable display result is the “big hit” and “variable display type” (big hit type).

  In the variation pattern type CA1-1, when the game state is in the low base such as the normal state, the variable display time of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is not shortened, and the variable pattern such as “pseudo-ream” or “slip” is variable. The variation pattern type is “no shortening (normal state)” in which the display effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern PA1-1 associated in advance. Fluctuation pattern type CA1-2 corresponds to the fact that the number of special figure reserved memory as the total reserved memory number is 2 to 4 when the gaming state is in the low base such as the normal state, It is a variation pattern type of “hold 2 to 4 shortened (normal state)” in which variable display time such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” is not executed because the variable display time of the decorative symbol is shortened and associated in advance Variation pattern PA1-2. The variable pattern types CA1-3 have a variable display time for special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the total number of reserved memories being 5 to 8 when the gaming state is in a low base such as a normal state. It is a variation pattern type of “Reservation 5-8 shortened (normal state)” in which variable display effects such as “pseudo ream” and “slip” are not executed, and a variation pattern PA1-3 associated in advance is displayed. Contains.

  In the variation pattern types CA1-4, when the gaming state is in a high base such as a short-time state, the variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols is not shortened, and variable such as “pseudo-ream” and “sliding” The variation pattern type is “no shortening (during high base)” in which the display effect is not executed, and includes a variation pattern PB1-1 associated in advance. The variable pattern type CA1-5 has a variable display time of special symbols and decorative symbols corresponding to the total number of reserved memories being 2 to 8 when the gaming state is in a high base such as a short time state. It is a variation pattern type “shortened 2 to 8 (high base)” that is shortened and the variable display effect of “pseudo-ream” or “slip” is not executed, and the variation pattern PB1-2 associated in advance is Contains. The variation pattern type CA1-6 is a variation pattern type of “sliding, pseudo-continuous” in which a variable display effect of “pseudo-run” or “slip” is executed when the variable display mode is “non-reach”. The associated variation patterns PA1-4 and variation patterns PA1-5 are included.

  The variation pattern type CA2-1 is when the reach effect is ended with the normal reach that becomes the normal reach effect after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state without executing the variable display effect of the “pseudo-ream”. Is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (losing) pseudo-relation” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of a reach combination, and includes a variation pattern PA2-1 and a variation pattern PA2-2 that are associated in advance. In the variation pattern type CA2-2, when the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect is executed and the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, the normal reach is involved, and when the reach effect ends, the fixed decorative symbol of the reach combination is displayed. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (lost) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern PB2-1 and a variation pattern PB2-2 that are associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA2-3 is a super-reach (super-reach α or super-reach β) after the decorative display variable display state is set to the reach state regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Is a variation pattern type of “super reach (losing)” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative symbol of a reach combination when the reach production ends, and a variation pattern PA3-1 and variation pattern PA3-2 associated in advance , Fluctuation pattern PB3-1 and fluctuation pattern PB3-2.

  In the variation pattern type CA3-1, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, but the normal display is performed after the variable symbol display state of the decorative pattern is set to the reach state, and when the reach effect ends, the definite decoration of the jackpot combination is determined. It is a variation pattern type of “no normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation” for deriving and displaying symbols, and includes a variation pattern PA4-1 and a variation pattern PA4-2 that are associated in advance. In the variation pattern type CA3-2, the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state, and then the normal reach is involved. Is a variation pattern type of “normal reach (big hit) pseudo-relation” and includes a variation pattern PB4-1 and a variation pattern PB4-2 that are associated in advance. The variation pattern type CA3-3 is used when the reach effect ends with the super reach after the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state regardless of whether or not the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Is a variation pattern type of “super reach” for deriving and displaying a definite decorative combination of jackpot combination, and previously associated variation pattern PA5-1, variation pattern PA5-2, variation pattern PB5-1, variation pattern PB5-2 is included.

  The variation pattern type CA4-1 is a variation pattern type of “2nd release chance stop” that derives and displays a definite decorative symbol that is one of the 2nd release chances TC1 to TC4, and “2nd release chance stop”. Are included in advance. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 are variation patterns in which the confirmed decorative symbol is one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4, and the variation pattern type CA4. −1. The variation pattern type CA4-2 is a method of deriving and displaying a definite decorative pattern of reach combination after setting the variable display state of the decorative symbol to the reach state when the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”. It is a variation pattern type of “open reach reach loss”, and includes a variation pattern that is associated in advance with “2 times open reach loss”. In the example of the variation pattern shown in FIG. 7, the variation pattern PC1-4 and the variation pattern PC1-5 are variation patterns having a fixed decorative design as a reach combination, and are included in the variation pattern type CA4-2. .

  In addition to the game control program, the ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 stores various selection data and table data used for controlling the progress of the game. . For example, the ROM 101 stores data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, setting tables, and the like prepared for the CPU 103 to perform various determinations, determinations, and settings. Further, the ROM 101 stores a plurality of types of table data constituting a plurality of command tables used for the CPU 103 to transmit control signals serving as various control commands from the main board 11, and a variation pattern as shown in FIG. Table data constituting a variation pattern table to be stored is stored.

  FIG. 9 shows a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 130 stored in the ROM 101. The special figure display result determination table 130 is displayed when the first start condition for allowing the start of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied, or in the second special symbol display device 4B. When the second start condition that allows the start of the special figure game using the second special figure is satisfied, before the fixed special symbol that becomes the variable display result (special figure display result) of the special symbol is derived and displayed, Random value for determining the special figure display result whether to control the big display game with the variable display result as “big hit” or whether to control the small display game with the variable display result as “small hit” It is a table referred to in order to make a decision based on MR1.

  In the special figure display result determination table 130, a numerical value (to be compared with the random number MR1 for determining the special figure display result depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a short-time state, or a probabilistic state. (Determined value) is assigned to one of the special chart display results of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “losing”. In this embodiment, whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic in the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic in the second special symbol display device 4B. Regardless, the special figure display result is determined with reference to the same special figure display result determination table 130.

  On the other hand, each of the case of the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Correspondingly, determination tables with different allocations of determination values for special figure display results may be prepared. In this case, in the case of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A and the case of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, The assignment of the decision value to the special chart display result of “small hit” may be different. As an example, in the case of a special game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B, as compared to the case of the special game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A, A determination value may be assigned to each special figure display result so that the ratio determined to the special figure display result of “small hit” is low.

  With such a setting, in the special figure game using the second special figure, the probability that the variable display result will be “small hit” is reduced compared to the special figure game using the first special figure. When the game ball is likely to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening with high opening control in a short time or short time state, the special figure display result is "small hit" and the little hit that hardly gets the prize ball It is possible to prevent the gaming state from being controlled, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency of the special game in the game will be increased, the time from the probability change state or short-time state (particularly the probability change state) to the 15th round big hit state will be shortened by such setting, and the game entertainment will be reduced. The effect that can be suppressed is great. Further, in the case of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, a determined value is assigned so that the special figure display result of “small hit” is not determined. May be.

  FIG. 10 shows a configuration example of the jackpot type determination table 131 stored in the ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table 131 sets the variable display mode to “hits” based on the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” and controlled to the big hit gaming state. This table is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of jackpot types such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. In the jackpot type determination table 131, whether the value of the fluctuation special figure designation buffer (fluctuation special figure designation buffer value) provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 shown in FIG. 14 is “1” or “2”. Accordingly, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is assigned to the big hit type such as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, and “surprise change”. Here, the variable special symbol designation buffer value becomes “1” when the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is executed, and the second special symbol display device 4B has the second value. It becomes “2” when the special figure game using the special figure is executed.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131, the table data indicating the determination values assigned to a plurality of types of jackpot types is the result of determining whether to control to the 15 round jackpot state or the 2 round jackpot state, and the end of the jackpot gaming state Later, it becomes data for determination corresponding to the determination result of whether or not to control to the probability variation state. For example, the table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probable change” or “probability change” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result of controlling to the 15th round jackpot state, while being assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type. The table data indicating the determined value corresponds to the determination result of controlling to the big round hit state. The table data indicating the decision value assigned to the “non-probable” jackpot type corresponds to the decision result that the control is not controlled to the probability change state, while being assigned to the jackpot type of “probability” or “surprise”. The table data indicating the determined value indicates the determination result that the control is performed in the probability variation state. The jackpot type determination table 131 is a value corresponding to the determined jackpot type (for example, any one of “0” to “2”) as a value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer 155 (a jackpot type buffer value). Table data (setting data) may be included.

  In the jackpot type determination table 131 shown in FIG. 10, the allocation of the determined value to each jackpot type differs depending on whether the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1” or “2”. For example, for the jackpot type of “probability change”, when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “72” is assigned, while the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value When “2” is “2”, a determined value in the range of “37” to “100” is assigned. When the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, a decision value in the range of “73” to “100” is assigned to the “surprise” jackpot type, while the variation special figure designation buffer value is “ In the case of “2”, the decision value is not assigned.

  In the setting example shown in FIG. 10, the special figure display result is “big hit” based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. When it is determined to control to the big hit gaming state, it is not determined to control to the two round big hit state with the big hit type as “surprise”. With this setting, when the game ball is easy to pass (enter) through the second start winning opening in the high opening control in the probability variation state or the short time state, the big hit type is “surprise” and most of the prize balls are It is possible to prevent the game from being controlled to a two-round big hit state that cannot be obtained, and to suppress a decrease in the gaming interests due to the delay in the game in the probability variation state or the short time state. In particular, when the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B in the probability change state or the short time state. Since the frequency at which the special game is executed is increased, such a setting has a great effect of suppressing the decline of the game entertainment. In addition to this setting, the special symbol game in the second special symbol display device 4B is executed in preference to the special symbol game in the first special symbol display device 4A, so that 15 rounds from the probability variation state and the short time state can be obtained. The ratio of hitting big hits can be increased to improve the gaming fun.

  Even when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, for example, a smaller decision value than that when the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is “1” is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. You may be made to do. Further, when the gaming state is the short-time state, if the big hit type is “surprise” and the game shifts to the probable change state after the end of the two round big hit state, the degree of advantage for the player increases. Thus, when the gaming state is the short-time state, even if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the big hit type determination table 131 is assigned so that the determination value is assigned to the special figure display result of “surprise”. The table data may be configured.

  11 and 12 show a configuration example of the variation pattern type determination table stored in the ROM 101. FIG. In this embodiment, as the variation pattern type determination table, the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 11A, the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B shown in FIG. 11B, and FIG. ) Loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A shown in FIG. 12B, Loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B shown in FIG. 12B, and Loss variation pattern type determination table shown in FIG. (Latency probability changing) 133C is prepared in advance.

  The jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the variation pattern type is changed according to the determination result of the jackpot type. This is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR3. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, a numerical value to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type depending on whether the determination result of the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprising change”. (Determined value) is assigned to any one of the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3, variation pattern type CA4-1, and variation pattern type CA4-2. In the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, the determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type so that the ratio determined for each variation pattern type differs depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. There is a part. For example, depending on whether the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to variation pattern type CA3-3 differs. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same variation pattern type can be varied according to the determination result as to which of the multiple types of jackpot types.

  Further, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A, there is a portion in which the determined values are assigned to different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of jackpot types is determined. For example, when the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-1 to the variation pattern type CA3-3, while the variation pattern type CA4- No decision value is assigned to 1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2. On the other hand, when the big hit type is “surprise”, the decision values are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 and the variation pattern type CA4-2, while the variation pattern type CA3-1 to No decision value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA3-3. As a result, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is controlled to the 2 round big hit state according to “surprise”, the variation pattern type different from the case of being controlled to the 15 round big hit state is determined. can do.

  When the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the assignment of the decision value to each variation pattern type may be made different. Thereby, the ratio determined to the same fluctuation | variation pattern classification can be varied according to which of a plurality of types of gaming states. Also, when the big hit type is determined as “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”, depending on whether the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a probability change state, or a short-time state Thus, the determined values may be assigned to different variation pattern types. Thereby, it is possible to determine different variation pattern types depending on which of the plurality of types of gaming states.

  Depending on whether the big hit type is determined to be “non-probable change” or “probability change”, the determination value may be assigned to each variation pattern type. Thereby, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R probability variation big hit” can be varied depending on which variable pattern type includes variable pattern execution. For example, when the jackpot type is “probable change”, a large number of decision values are assigned, while when the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, variable display is performed using a variation pattern included in the variation pattern type to which a small decision value is assigned. In such a case, the degree of expectation that the variable display result is “15R probability variation big hit” is increased.

  The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern type when it is determined (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit”. In the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B, all numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1. Here, a part of the determined value is assigned to the variation pattern type CA4-1 in accordance with the case where the jackpot type is “surprise” in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. . As described above, the variation pattern type CA4-1 is a common variation pattern type in the case where the big hit type is “surprise” and in the case where the special figure display result is “small hit”. That is, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B include a common variation pattern type. Is set to The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B may be set so that a determination value is assigned to a variation pattern type different from the variation pattern type that can be determined when the big hit type is “surprise”. Good. In other words, the table data corresponding to the big hit type “surprise” in the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A and the table data constituting the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B include a common variation pattern type. , Each may be set to include a unique variation pattern type.

  The loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (during high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability variation) 133C change the special figure display result to “lost”. Then, when it is determined (predetermined), it is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type. Here, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A is selected as a use table when the gaming state is the normal state, for example. On the other hand, the loss variation pattern type determination table (in the high base) 133B is a high-accuracy and high-base state in which, for example, the gaming state is a short-time state, or the short-time control and the high-opening control are performed in the certainty-change state. When selected as a use table. The loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C is selected as a use table when the time variation control or the high release control is not performed in the probability variation state (latency probability changing).

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability change) 133C, the number of special figure hold memory as the total hold memory number Accordingly, the numerical values (determination values) to be compared with the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-6, variation pattern type CA2-1 to variation pattern type CA2-. 3 is assigned. In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability change) 133C, the ratios determined for each variation pattern type are mutually determined. Differently, there is a part in which a determined value is assigned to each variation pattern type. For example, when the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability variation) 133C are compared, the variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-1 are compared. There is a portion where assignment of the decision value to the variation pattern type CA2-3 is different. Thereby, the ratio determined for the same variation pattern type can be varied depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state, the high base, or the latent probability change.

  In the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C, determination values are assigned to different variation pattern types. There is a part that has been. For example, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A and the variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C, determination values are not assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-4 and CA1-5. On the other hand, determination values may be assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3 according to the number of special figure reservations stored. On the other hand, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (in the high base) 133B, the determination values are not assigned to the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-3, while the variation pattern type CA1- For 4 and the variation pattern type CA1-5, a determined value may be assigned according to the number of special figure reservations stored. As a result, different variation pattern types can be determined according to whether the gaming state is the normal state, the high base, or the latent probability change.

  In this embodiment, reference is made to any one of the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C. Accordingly, it is possible to determine any one of the variation pattern type CA1-1 to variation pattern type CA1-6 and the variation pattern type CA2-1 to variation pattern type CA2-3. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the variation pattern types CA1-1 to CA1-6 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “lost” and the variable display mode is “non-reach”. It is. The variation pattern types CA2-1 to CA2-3 are variation pattern types corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “losing” and the variable display mode is “reach”. Therefore, based on the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (during high base) 133B, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) By determining the variation pattern type with reference to any one of 133C, it is possible to determine whether or not the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to the reach state.

  FIG. 13 shows a configuration example of a variation pattern determination table stored in the ROM 101. In this embodiment, a loss variation pattern determination table 134A shown in FIG. 13A and a hit variation pattern determination table 134B shown in FIG. 13B are prepared in advance as variation pattern determination tables.

  The loss variation pattern determination table 134A is based on the variation pattern determination random value MR4 according to the determination result of the variation pattern type, etc., when it is determined (preliminary determination) that the special figure display result is “lost”. It is a table referred to in order to determine any one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. In the loss variation pattern determination table 134A, a numerical value (determination value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type is one corresponding to the case where the special figure display result is “lost”. Or, it is assigned to a plurality of variation patterns (loss variation patterns).

  The hit variation pattern determination table 134B determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern determination disturbance is determined according to the determination result of the variation pattern type when the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit” or “small hit” (predetermined). It is a table referred to in order to determine a variation pattern as one of a plurality of types based on the numerical value MR4. In the winning variation pattern determination table 134B, a numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern according to the variation pattern type indicates that the special figure display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Are assigned to one or a plurality of variation patterns (per variation pattern).

  The RAM 102 provided in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 2 may be a backup RAM that is partially or entirely backed up by a backup power source created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the contents of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the backup power supply cannot be supplied because the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged). The In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  Such a RAM 102 is provided with a game control data holding area 150 as shown in FIG. 14 as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Yes. The game control data holding area 150 shown in FIG. 14 includes a first special figure hold storage unit 151A, a second special figure hold storage unit 151B, a general figure hold storage unit 151C, a game control flag setting unit 152, and a game A control timer setting unit 153, a game control counter setting unit 154, and a game control buffer setting unit 155 are provided.

  The first special figure storage unit 151A is a special game in which a game ball wins a first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball apparatus 6A and the first start condition is satisfied but the first start condition is not satisfied. On-hold data of (a special game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A) is stored. As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A associates the reservation number with the winning order (game ball detection order) to the first start winning opening, and sets the first start condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held. The data is stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the first special figure hold storage unit 151A in this way becomes hold storage information indicating that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is put on hold.

  The second special figure holding storage unit 151B receives the game ball at the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B and the second start condition is satisfied, but the second start condition is not satisfied. The hold data of the game (the special game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit 151B associates with the holding number in the winning order (game ball detection order) to the second starting winning opening, and sets the second starting condition in the passage (entrance) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the numerical data indicating the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the establishment is held The data is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data stored in the second special figure hold storage unit 151B in this way becomes hold storage information indicating that the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is held.

  The universal figure storage unit 151 </ b> C stores the general game holding information that has not yet been started by the normal symbol display 20 even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the universal figure storage unit 151C determines the common figure display result extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the like by the CPU 103 based on the passage of the game balls in association with the reservation numbers in the order in which the game balls have passed the passing gate 41. For example, numerical data indicating the random number MR5 is stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated in accordance with the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 152 stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an on state or an off state for each of a plurality of types of flags. In this embodiment, the game control flag setting unit 152 is provided with a special figure process flag, a common figure process flag, a big hit flag, a small hit flag, a probability change flag, a short time flag, and the like.

  The special figure process flag indicates the progress of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A, the progress of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, and the like. In step S15 of FIG. 33 executed for control and the special symbol process shown in FIG. 34, which process should be selected and executed is instructed. The normal symbol process flag is used to select / execute processing in step S16 of FIG. 33 or the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 41 in order to control the progress of the normal symbol game using the normal symbol by the normal symbol indicator 20. Tell what to do.

  The big hit flag is set to the on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “big hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the big hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game. The small hit flag is set to an on state in response to a determination (predetermined) that the special figure display result is “small hit” when the special figure game is started. On the other hand, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off in response to the small hit symbol being stopped and displayed as a confirmed special symbol in the special figure game.

  The probability change flag is set to the on state in response to the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 being controlled to the probability change state, and is cleared to the off state in response to the end of the probability change state. . The time reduction flag is set to the on state in response to the start of the time reduction control when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a certain change state or the time reduction state, while the time reduction control is ended. It is cleared and turned off in response to.

  The game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with various timers used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 153 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers. In this embodiment, the game control timer setting unit 153 is provided with a game control process timer, a special figure variation timer, a common figure variation timer, and the like.

  The game control process timer is for measuring, for example, a time for controlling the progress of the big hit gaming state on the main board 11 side. As a specific example, the game control process timer stores, as a game control process timer value, data indicating a timer value corresponding to a time measured to control the progress of the big hit gaming state, and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the game control process timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from a predetermined time, such as a start time of a big hit gaming state, and counts up periodically.

  The special figure variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the special figure game such as a variable symbol display time (special figure variation time) in the special figure game. . As a specific example, the special figure variation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured in order to control the progress of the special figure game as a special figure fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the special figure variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to an elapsed time from the start time of the special figure game and periodically counts up.

  The universal variation timer is for measuring, on the main board 11 side, a time for controlling the progress of the universal diagram game such as a variable symbol display time (ordinary variation time) of the normal symbol in the ordinary game. . As a specific example, the normal fluctuation timer stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the time measured to control the progress of the normal figure game as a normal fluctuation timer value and periodically counts down. Used as a counter. Alternatively, the normal time variation timer may be used as an up counter that stores data indicating a timer value corresponding to the elapsed time from the start time of the normal time game and periodically counts up.

  The game control counter setting unit 154 is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting the count values used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 154 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. In this embodiment, the game control counter setting unit 154 includes a random counter, a first start winning determination counter, a second start winning determination counter, a first reserved memory number counter, a second reserved memory number counter, and a total reserved memory number counter. , A short time counter, a round counter and the like are provided.

  The random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 is a numerical value extracted from the random number circuit 104 or a part of numerical data indicating a random number value used for controlling the progress of the game, separately from the random number circuit 104. This is for the CPU 103 to count the data so that it can be updated by software. For example, in the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR5 is stored as a random count value, and each random number is randomly or irregularly set according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The numerical data indicating the numerical value is updated. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The first start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the first start port switch 22A is ON. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal from the first start port switch 22A is ON, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is incremented by one. When the stored value in the first start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball that has normally entered the first start winning opening formed by the normal winning ball device 6A is detected. Judgment is made. In addition, the stored value in the first start winning determination counter is cleared when it is determined that the signal state in the first start winning signal is OFF or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The second start winning determination counter counts the number of times that it has been determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal that is the detection signal of the game ball transmitted from the second start port switch 22B is ON. belongs to. For example, each time it is determined that the signal state in the second start winning signal from the second start port switch 22B is ON, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is incremented by one. When the stored value in the second start winning determination counter reaches a predetermined winning determination value, the game ball that has entered the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is normally detected. Is made. In addition, the stored value in the second start winning determination counter is cleared when the signal state in the second start winning signal is determined to be off, or when it is determined that the winning determination value has been reached. It may be initialized to “0”.

  The first reserved memory number counter is for counting the first reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A. For example, in the first reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the first reserved memory number is stored as the first reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The second reserved memory number counter is for counting the second reserved memory number that is the number of reserved data in the second special figure reserved memory unit 151B. For example, in the second reserved memory number counter, count value data corresponding to the second reserved memory number is stored as the second reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1) Addition or 1 subtraction). The total reserved memory number counter is for counting the total reserved memory number obtained by adding up the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. For example, count value data corresponding to the total reserved memory number is stored in the total reserved memory number counter as a total reserved memory number count value, and updated (for example, 1 addition or 1 subtraction) in accordance with the increase or decrease in the total reserved memory number )

  The time reduction counter counts the number of remaining special-purpose games that can be executed before the completion of the time reduction control in the high base when the game state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a probable change state or a time reduction state. belongs to. For example, when the jackpot gaming state is ended, data indicating the count initial value “100” corresponding to the jackpot type buffer value being “0” is set as the hourly count count value in the hourly number counter. . Thereafter, until the variable display result becomes “big hit”, the time count count value is decremented by 1 every time the special figure game ends. Then, when the time reduction count value reaches “0”, the time reduction control is terminated and the control to shift from the high base to the low base is performed by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. .

  The round number counter is for counting the number of round games executed in the big hit gaming state. For example, in the round number counter, data indicating a count initial value “1” at the start of the big hit gaming state is set as the round number count value. When one round game is finished and the next round game is started, the round count value is incremented by 1 and updated.

  The game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers. In this embodiment, the game control buffer setting unit 155 is provided with a transmission command buffer, a start port buffer, a variation special figure designation buffer, a jackpot type buffer, and the like.

  The transmission command buffer is used to temporarily store setting data for transmitting a control command from the main board 11 to the sub-side control board. For example, the transmission command buffer includes a plurality of buffer areas (for example, “12”), and setting data indicating storage addresses in the ROM 101 of the command table corresponding to the control command to be transmitted is stored in each buffer area. The In addition, a buffer area in which setting data is written and read in the transmission command buffer may be specified by a transmission command pointer or the like, and may be configured so that a plurality of buffer areas can be used as a ring buffer.

  The starting port buffer stores a buffer value indicating whether a game ball that has entered the first starting winning port or the second starting winning port is detected. As an example, “1” is set in the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of a game ball that has entered the first start winning port by the first start port switch 22A. Further, “2” is set to the start port buffer value in response to the normal detection of the game ball that has entered the second start winning port by the second start port switch 22B.

  The variable special symbol designation buffer includes a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. A buffer value indicating whether the special figure game is executed is stored. As an example, “1” is set in the variable special figure designation buffer value in response to the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Further, in response to the execution of the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B, “2” is set to the variable special figure designation buffer value. Then, in response to the end of the special figure game, the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “0”.

  The big hit type buffer stores a buffer value corresponding to a determination result in which the big hit type is one of a plurality of types when the variable display result is “big hit”. For example, based on the setting in the jackpot type determination table 131 as shown in FIG. If there is, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “1”, and if the jackpot type is “surprise”, the jackpot type buffer value is set to “2”.

  The I / O 105 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 3 has an input port for receiving various signals transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100, and various signals to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100. And an output port for transmission.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the effect control board 12 is provided with an effect control CPU 120 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM 121 that stores an effect control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work area for the effect control CPU 120. Random number for updating numerical data indicating random numbers independently of the RAM 122, the display control unit 123 for executing processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, and the effect control CPU 120 A circuit 124 and an I / O 125 are mounted. As an example, in the effect control board 12, when the effect control CPU 120 executes an effect control program read from the ROM 121, a process for controlling the effect operation by the effect electric component is executed. At this time, the effect control CPU 120 reads the fixed data from the ROM 121, the effect control CPU 120 writes the various data to the RAM 122 and temporarily stores them, and the effect control CPU 120 stores the effect data in the RAM 122. Fluctuation data reading operation for reading out various fluctuation data temporarily stored, the reception control CPU 120 for receiving the input of various signals from the outside of the presentation control board 12 via the I / O 125, and the presentation control CPU 120 for I / O A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 via O125 is also performed.

  The effect control CPU 120, the ROM 121, and the RAM 122 may be included in a one-chip effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board 12. Alternatively, while the production control CPU 120 is built in the production control microcomputer, at least one of the ROM 121 and the RAM 122 may be externally attached to the production control microcomputer. The random number circuit 124 may be any one that is built in or externally attached to the production control microcomputer. In the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting a video signal to the image display device 5, wiring for transmitting a sound effect signal as an information signal indicating sound number data to the sound control board 13, Wiring for transmitting an electrical decoration signal as an information signal indicating lamp data is connected to the lamp control board 14. Furthermore, on the effect control board 12, wiring for transmitting an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action for the trigger button 31A has been detected from the trigger sensor 35A, and the player for the push button 31B. As an information signal indicating that an operation detection signal as an information signal indicating that the player's operation action has been detected is detected as a player's operation action for the wiring for transmitting from the push sensor 35B, the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. Wiring for transmitting the operation detection signal is also connected from the tilt direction sensor unit 32.

  On the effect control board 12, for example, the random number circuit 124 or the like counts the numerical data indicating various random values used for controlling the effect operation so as to be updateable. The random number used for controlling such a production operation is also called a production random number. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram illustrating random numbers counted on the side of the effect control board 12. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, on the side of the production control board 12, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the display system notice type, the random value SR1-2 for determining the operation type notice type, and the display system notice are displayed. Random value SR2-1 for determining a pattern, Random value SR2-2 for determining an operation system notice pattern, Random value SR3 for determining a probable change promotion effect, Random value SR4 for determining a probable change promotion pattern, The numerical value data indicating the random number value SR5, the random number value SR6 for determining the stop symbol notice effect pattern, the random value SR7 for determining the required number of operations, and the random value SR8 for determining the number of notice symbols are controlled to be countable. . In addition, in order to improve a production effect, random numbers other than these may be used. For example, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining the final stop symbol used for determining a final decorative symbol (final stop symbol) that becomes a variable display result of the decorative symbol may be controlled to be countable.

  The random value SR1-1 for determining the display system notice type determines whether or not to execute the notice effect by displaying a predetermined effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the notice when it is decided to execute it. It is a random value used to determine the type as any of a plurality of types prepared in advance. The random number SR1-2 for determining the operation system notice type determines whether or not to execute the notice effect by the effect operation according to a predetermined instruction operation on the stick controller 30 (including the operation stick 30A and the trigger button 31A) and the push button 31B. This is a random value used for determining one of a plurality of types prepared in advance as a notice type when it is determined to execute. As an example, the random number value SR1-1 for determining the display system notice type takes a value in the range of “1” to “377”, and the random value SR1-2 for determining the operation type notice type is “1” to “491”. Takes a value in the range.

  When the random number SR2-1 for determining the display system notice pattern is determined to be one of the display system notice types, a plurality of display system notice patterns that are notice patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect are provided. A random value used to determine one of the types. When the random number SR2-2 for determining the operation system notice pattern is determined as one of the operation system notice types, a plurality of operation system notice patterns that are notice patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation that becomes the notice effect are provided. A random value used to determine one of the types. As an example, the random number value SR2-1 for determining the display system notice pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “643”, and the random value SR2-2 for determining the operation system notice pattern is “1” to “779”. Takes a value in the range.

  The random value SR3 for determining the probable promotion effect has a plurality of predetermined timings when executing the promotion effect corresponding to the timing when the probable promotion effect is started when the jackpot promotion effect is executed as the probable promotion effect. It is a random value used to determine any of the following. As an example, the random value SR3 for determining the probable promotion effect takes a value in the range of “1” to “511”. The random value SR4 for determining the probable promotion effect pattern is used to determine one of a plurality of types of probable promotion effect patterns corresponding to the effect contents when the jackpot promotion effect is executed as the probable promotion effect. It is a random value. As an example, the random value SR4 for determining the probable promotion effect pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “551”.

  This is a random value SR5 for determining whether to execute the stop symbol notice effect, or a random value used to determine whether or not to execute the stop symbol notice effect. As an example, the random number value SR5 for determining the stop symbol notice effect execution takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. Random value SR6 for determining stop symbol notice effect pattern, random number value used for determining stop symbol notice effect pattern corresponding to the contents of effect operation to one of a plurality of types when executing stop symbol notice effect It is. As an example, the random value SR6 for determining the stop symbol announcement effect pattern takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number value SR7 for determining the required number of operations is a random number value used for determining the number of operations necessary to change the effect mode when the button operation promotion effect is executed in the stop symbol notice effect pattern. It is. As an example, the random number SR7 for determining the required number of operations takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. The random number value SR8 for determining the number of notice symbols is a random value used for determining the number of notice symbols to be displayed on the image display device 5 when the stop symbol notice effect is executed. As an example, the random number SR8 for determining the number of notice symbols takes a value in the range of “1” to “100”. Note that the range of values that each random value takes is shown as an example, and can be set to an arbitrary range.

  In addition to the effect control program, the ROM 121 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 stores various data tables used for controlling the effect operation. For example, the ROM 121 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables, determination tables, and control pattern tables prepared for the production control CPU 120 to perform various determinations, determinations, and controls.

  FIG. 16 shows a configuration example of the notice type determination table stored in the ROM 121. In this embodiment, as the notice type determination table, a display type notice type determination table 140A shown in FIG. 16A and an operation type notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B are prepared in advance. . The display system notice type determination table 140A determines whether or not to execute a notice effect of the display system notice type by displaying a predetermined effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, and the display system notice type in the case of execution. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine which of a plurality of types is based on the random number SR1-1 for determining the display system notice type. The operation type advance notice type determination table 140B determines whether or not to execute a notice effect of the operation type advance notice type according to a predetermined instruction operation on the stick controller 30 or the push button 31B, and a plurality of operation type advance notice types in the case of execution. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine which type is selected based on the random number SR1-2 for determining the operation type notice type.

  In the display system advance notice type determination table 140A, the display system is selected as one of the display system advance notice types of no character display CAY1 and step-up display CAY2 according to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number SR1-1 for determining the notice type is assigned. Here, the display type notice type of the character display CAY1 is the notice type in which the effect display for displaying the character image in the display area of the image display device 5 is performed as the effect operation included in the notice effect of “character display”. It is. The display system notice type of the step-up display CAY2 is an effect that allows a plurality of kinds of effect images to be displayed in a predetermined order in the display area of the image display device 5 as an effect operation included in the notice effect of “step-up display”. This is a notice type to be displayed.

  In the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B, there is no operation type advance notice or a push button is issued according to the first special figure hold memory number or the second special figure hold memory number or the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR1-2 for determining the operation system advance notice type is assigned to any of the operation system advance notice types of CBY1, push button continuous hit CBY2, trigger button single shot CBY3, and trigger button continuous hit CBY4. ing. Here, the operation type advance notice type of the single push button CBY1 is that the player has performed the instruction operation of the push button 31B once within the operation valid period as the effect operation included in the notice effect of “push button single shot”. Accordingly, it is a notice type in which the effect mode (effect content) changes due to the effect image switching display or the like. The operation type advance notice type of the push button continuous hit CBY2 is the number of times the player has instructed to operate the push button 31B within the operation valid period (for example, the total number of times or per unit time) The notice mode changes depending on the effect image switching display according to the number of operations and the operation interval. The operation type advance notification type of the trigger button single CBY3 is that the player has operated the tilting operation of the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 within the operation valid period as an effect operation included in the “trigger button single release” advance notice effect or the trigger button 31A. This is a notice type in which the production mode is changed by switching the production image or the like in response to performing the instruction operation once. The operation type advance notice type of the trigger button continuous hit CBY4 is that the operation button 30A of the stick controller 30 is tilted and the trigger button 31A is instructed as an effect operation included in the notice effect of the “trigger button repeat hit”. This is a notice type in which the effect mode changes depending on the effect image switching display or the like according to the number of times (for example, the total number, the number of operations per unit time, the operation interval, etc.).

  In the setting example of the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, the variable display result such as the fluctuation pattern PA1-1, the fluctuation pattern PA1-4, or the fluctuation pattern PA1-5 is “lost” and the variable display mode is changed. Even in the case of a variation pattern that becomes “non-reach”, it may be determined as an operation type notice type other than that without an operation type notice. On the other hand, in the case of a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state, it may be set so that it is not determined as an operation system advance notice type other than no operation system advance notice. In general, in the case of a variation pattern in which the decorative symbol variable display state does not reach the reach state, there are many cases in which the special symbol or the decorative symbol variable display time is short. It is difficult to enhance the production effect. In addition, even if the notice effect using the stick controller 30 or the push button 31B is executed, if the variable display state of the decorative pattern does not become the reach state, the player is greatly discouraged, and the gaming interest is reduced. Invite. In view of this, it is possible to prevent such a problem from occurring by setting so that the notice effect that is the operation notice is not executed when the reach state is not reached.

  17 and 18 show a configuration example of a display system notice pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121. FIG. In this embodiment, as a display system notice pattern determination table, a display system notice pattern determination table 141A shown in FIG. 17 and a display system notice pattern determination table 141B shown in FIG. 18 are prepared in advance. When the display system notice pattern determination table 141A is determined as the display system notice type of the character display CAY1, the display system notice pattern is selected from a plurality of kinds of display system notice patterns based on the random number SR2-1 for determining the display system notice pattern. It is a table that is referred to to determine When the display system advance notice pattern determination table 141B is determined as the display system advance notice type of the step-up display CAY2, the display system advance notice pattern is determined based on the random number SR2-1 for determining the display system advance notice pattern. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not.

  In the display system notice pattern determination table 141A, one of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-9 is used for determining the display system notice pattern according to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-1 is assigned. Then, in the display system notice pattern determination table 141A, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is not executed, any one of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4 is determined. Is assigned. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined value is assigned to any of the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-4. Absent. Accordingly, the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to display system notice pattern YAP1-4 execute the notice effect in a predetermined effect form when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed. The display system notice pattern YAP1-5 to the display system notice pattern YAP1-9 execute the notice effect in a predetermined effect mode corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of the pseudo continuous change in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. It is supposed to be.

  In the display system notice pattern YAP1-1 to display system notice pattern YAP1-4, for example, the type and number of characters displayed as effect images are different, and the display mode of effect images indicating the same character (for example, the color of clothes of characters) Etc.), or a combination of these, or by changing the display mode of other characters, etc. It only needs to be recognized. In addition, it is not limited to what makes the production | presentation aspect which a player can recognize easily, You may suggest that reliability differs by making the display aspect difficult for a player to recognize. The reliability of the notice effect may be the possibility that the variable display state of the decorative symbol will reach the reach state, the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, or the variable display result may be “ The possibility that the big hit type in the case of “big hit” becomes “probable change” may be used. In the display system announcement pattern YAP1-5 to the display system announcement pattern YAP1-9, the display system announcement pattern YAP1-1 to display system announcement pattern YAP1-4 is notified in accordance with each of the initial fluctuation and the pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is only necessary to set so that an effect image indicating the same character as the effect or a different character is displayed.

  In the display system advance notice pattern determination table 141B, the display system advance notice pattern is determined as one of the display system advance notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system advance notice pattern YAP2-9 according to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-1 is assigned. Then, in the display system notice pattern determination table 141B, when the variable pattern effect does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-4 is determined. Is assigned. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined value is assigned to any of the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-4. Absent. Accordingly, the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-4 execute the notice effect in a predetermined effect form when the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed. The display system notice pattern YAP2-5 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-9 execute the notice effect in a predetermined effect form corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of the quasi-continuous variation in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. It is supposed to be.

  In the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-4, for example, the number of steps in which the effect image is switched and displayed is changed, or the display mode of the outer frame of the effect image (for example, the frame pattern and display color) Etc.), different whether or not to display a predetermined effect image in the first step as the first stage, or a combination of some or all of these, or other step-up display It is only necessary to allow the player to recognize that the reliability of the “step-up display” in the notice effect is different by changing the arbitrary display mode in. In the display system notice pattern YAP2-5 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-9, the notice by any of the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-4 corresponding to each of the initial fluctuation and the pseudo continuous fluctuation. It is only necessary to set so that a step-up display similar to the effect or a different step-up display is performed.

  The display system notice pattern may include a pattern that does not perform the notice effect that becomes the display system notice in a part of the initial fluctuation and the pseudo series fluctuation due to the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. However, the reliability of the notice effect that is executed in response to the change display after the execution of the pseudo continuous change (after the re-change) is the advance notice that is executed in response to the previous change display (initial change or pseudo continuous change). It may be more than the reliability of the production. In addition, when a notice effect that becomes a display system notice is once performed in either the initial fluctuation or the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, a notice effect that becomes a display system notice is performed corresponding to all the pseudo-series fluctuations thereafter. Set as follows. As a result, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” as the number of pseudo-variable increases increases, but the reliability of the notice effect is increased. It is possible to prevent a decrease in game entertainment due to a decrease in the degree and interruption of the notice effect.

  19 and 20 show a configuration example of the operation system notice pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121. FIG. In this embodiment, as the operation system notice pattern determination table, the operation system notice pattern determination table 142A shown in FIG. 19A, the operation system notice pattern determination table 142B shown in FIG. 19B, and FIG. ) And an operation system notice pattern determination table 142D shown in FIG. 20D are prepared in advance. The operation system notice pattern determination table 142A is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of operation system notice patterns when the operation system notice type of the push button single CBY1 is decided. The operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142B is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of operation system advance notice patterns when the operation system advance notice type of the push button continuous hit CBY2 is determined. The operation system notice pattern determination table 142C is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of operation system notice patterns when the operation system notice pattern of the trigger button single CBY3 is determined. The operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142D is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of operation system advance notice patterns when the operation system advance notice type of the trigger button repeated hit CBY4 is determined.

  In the operation system warning pattern determination table 142A, one of the operation system warning pattern YBP1-1 to the operation system warning pattern YBP1-8 is used for determining the operation system warning pattern according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-2 is assigned. In the operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142A, when the variable display effect is not executed for the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined values are assigned to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-2. ing. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined value is assigned to both the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-2. Absent. Therefore, the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-2 are used to execute the "push button single shot" advance notice corresponding to the case where the "pseudo-continuous" variable display effect is not executed. It is. The operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-3 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-8 provide a "push button single shot" advance notice effect corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of the pseudo continuous change in the "pseudo continuous" variable display effect. It is for execution.

  In the operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142B, an operation system advance notice pattern determination is made to one of the operation system advance notice patterns YBP2-1 to YBP2-8 according to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-2 is assigned. In the operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142B, when the variation pattern does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined values are assigned to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-2. ing. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined value is assigned to both the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-2. Absent. Therefore, the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-2 are for executing the "push button repeated hit" notice effect in response to the case where the "pseudo-continuous" variable display effect is not executed. It is. The operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-3 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP2-8 provide the "push button repeated hit" notice effect corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of the quasi-continuous variation in the "pseudo-ream" variable display effect. It is for execution.

  In the operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142C, an operation system advance notice pattern determination is made to one of the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-1 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-8 according to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-2 is assigned. Then, in the operation system notice pattern determination table 142C, when the variation pattern does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined values are assigned to the operation system notice pattern YBP3-1 and the operation system notice pattern YBP3-2. ing. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the determined value is assigned to both the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-2. Absent. Therefore, the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP3-2 are for executing the “trigger button single shot” advance notice corresponding to the case where the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed. It is. The operation system notice pattern YBP3-3 to the operation system notice pattern YBP3-8 displays the notice effect of “single trigger button” corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of the pseudo continuous change in the variable display effect of “pseudo train”. It is for execution.

  In the operation system advance notice pattern determination table 142D, an operation system advance notice pattern determination is made to one of the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-1 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-8 according to the fluctuation pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern designation command. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR2-2 is assigned. Then, in the operation system notice pattern determination table 142D, when the variation pattern does not execute the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, determined values are assigned to the operation system notice pattern YBP4-1 and the operation system notice pattern YBP4-2. ing. On the other hand, in the case of the variation pattern for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, a determined value is assigned to both the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-2. Absent. Therefore, the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-1 and the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-2 are for executing the "trigger button repeated strike" advance notice corresponding to the case where the "pseudo-continuous" variable display effect is not executed. It is. The operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-3 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP4-8 provide a notice effect of "trigger button repeated strike" corresponding to the number of executions (total number of times) of the pseudo continuous change in the variable display effect of "pseudo train". It is for execution.

  In the notice effect of “single push button” by the operation system notice pattern determined using the operation system notice pattern determination table 142A, after the variable display of the decorative design is started or at the same time as the variable display is started, For example, by displaying an effect image indicating the push button 31B and a message image such as “Push the button to aim” in the display area of the image display device 5, the player can perform one instruction operation on the push button 31B. A button operation promotion effect is urged. Subsequently, for example, by displaying an effect image of a character holding a bow and arrow toward the roulette, an effect operation is performed so that the player can perform an instruction operation of the push button 31B at an appropriate timing. Then, when an operation action by the player is detected within the operation effective period, the variable display state of the decorative symbol is set to the reach state by displaying an effect image that is hit by the bow and arrow at the time of detection. It is only necessary that the player can be notified of the reliability such as the possibility of becoming a big hit or the possibility of the variable display result being “big hit”.

  As an example, in the roulette, a frame suggesting reliability such as “still still” or “extreme heat” is provided, and in the operation system notice pattern YBP1-1, a bow and arrow hits the “not yet” frame when an operation is detected. Thus, while notifying that the reliability is low, it is only necessary to notify that the reliability is high in the operation system notice pattern YBP1-2 by hitting the “extremely hot” frame when detecting the operation. While changing the effect mode at the time of detecting the operation of the push button 31B, changing the type of the character displayed as the effect image, and the display mode of the effect image showing the same character (for example, the color of the clothes of the character) are different. It is only necessary to make it possible for the player to recognize that the reliability is different by making it different, or by making other arbitrary production modes different. Note that when the instruction operation for the push button 31B is not detected within the operation valid period, the notice effect may be terminated without releasing the bow and arrow so that the player cannot recognize the reliability. Thereby, operation with respect to push button 31B can be accelerated | stimulated, and the player's willingness to participate in a notice effect can be improved. The presentation operation in the “push button single-shot” notice effect is not limited to a game using a roulette, and may be an arbitrary game such as a game in which a bar graph that expands and contracts stops at a predetermined position. A predetermined message may be notified by an instruction operation on the push button 31B.

  In the notice effect of “push button continuous hitting” by the operation system notice pattern determined using the operation system notice pattern decision table 142B, after the variable display of the decorative design is started or at the same time as the variable display is started, For example, the player can perform a continuous hitting operation on the push button 31B by displaying an effect image showing the push button 31B and a message image such as “Win the button repeatedly to win the tug of war” in the display area of the image display device 5. A button operation promotion effect is urged to be executed. Subsequently, for example, by displaying an effect image in which the self character and the opponent character perform a tug-of-war, an effect operation that allows the player to perform the continuous operation of the push button 31B is executed. Then, based on the number of detections of the operation action by the player within the operation effective period, the detection interval, etc., displaying an effect image in which the degree of superiority or inferiority of the tug of war changes, and when the operation effective period ends, It suffices if the player can be notified of the reliability by displaying an effect image indicating the result of the tug-of-war game.

  As an example, in the operation system notice pattern YBP2-1, the result of the tug of war is lost, so that the reliability is low, while in the operation system notice pattern YBP2-2, the result of the tug of war is won. What is necessary is just to alert | report that reliability is high. However, even in the case of the operation system notice pattern YBP2-2, when the instruction operation for the push button 31B is not detected within the operation valid period or when the number of detections is less than the predetermined number, the result of the tug-of-war game is lost. The original reliability may not be notified. Thereby, operation with respect to push button 31B can be accelerated | stimulated, and the player's willingness to participate in a notice effect can be improved. The effect mode after the continuous hitting operation of the push button 31B is made different, the type of the self character and the opponent character displayed as the effect image is changed, and the effect image display mode showing the same self character and the opponent character (for example, Different clothing colors, etc., different display styles of display images (such as the presence or absence of ornaments, the color, thickness, length, number, etc.) of the self-character and opponent character, or What is necessary is just to enable a player to recognize that reliability differs by changing other arbitrary production | presentation aspects. The presentation operation in the “push button continuous strike” notice effect is not limited to a game that is a tug of war, for example, a game that extends a bar graph that expands to a predetermined length or more as an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected, An arbitrary game may be played, or a predetermined message may be notified on the condition that the number of detections of the instruction operation for the push button 31B has reached a predetermined number.

  In the notice effect of “single trigger button” by the operation system notice pattern determined using the operation system notice pattern decision table 142C, after the variable display of the decorative design is started or at the same time as the variable display is started, For example, by displaying an effect image showing the stick controller 30 and a message image such as “Let aim and fire!” In the display area of the image display device 5, etc., the tilting operation of the operating rod 30A and the trigger button 31A 1 A button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform the instruction operation for the first time is executed. Subsequently, for example, by displaying an effect image of a sight (scope) aiming at a flying airplane (enemy aircraft) so that the display position can be changed, the player performs the tilting operation of the operation rod 30A. An effect operation is performed so that the trigger button 31A can be instructed at the timing. When an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected within the operation effective period, an effect image in which a shell is fired at the time of detection is displayed, and an effect image indicating whether or not the enemy aircraft has been successfully shot down. It is sufficient that the reliability can be notified so that the player can recognize by displaying.

  As an example, in the operation system notice pattern YBP3-1, the aim is not matched with the enemy aircraft regardless of the tilting operation mode of the operation rod 30A, and the enemy aircraft is not hit and cannot be shot down, so that the reliability is low. To do. On the other hand, in the operation system notice pattern YBP3-2, the aim is matched to the enemy aircraft according to the tilting operation of the operation rod 30A, and the bullet fired at this time hits the enemy aircraft and can shoot down, so the reliability is high. Inform the effect. Note that even if the operation system notice pattern YBP3-2 is used, the enemy aircraft may not be shot down if the bullet is fired in a state where the aim does not match the enemy aircraft. Alternatively, in the operation system notice pattern YBP3-2, even if a bullet is fired in a state where the aim does not match the enemy aircraft, the bullet may hit the enemy aircraft and be shot down. Different types of effects when detecting the operation of the trigger button 31A, different types of enemy aircraft (eg, propeller aircraft, jet fighters, virtual flying objects, etc.) displayed as the effect image, The player may be able to recognize that the reliability is different by changing the display mode of the effect image indicating the color (for example, the color of the machine body) or by changing the other arbitrary display mode. Note that when the instruction operation for the trigger button 31A is not detected within the operation valid period, the notice effect may be ended, for example, by the enemy aircraft being shot down by an enemy aircraft attack. Thereby, operation with respect to the operating rod 30A and the trigger button 31A can be promoted, and the player's willingness to participate in the notice effect can be improved. The directing action of the “trigger button single shot” notice effect is not limited to a game that shoots down enemy aircraft, but may be an arbitrary game such as a game that captures one prey that escapes. Alternatively, if one of a plurality of cards is selected, a predetermined message written on the card may be notified.

  In the notice effect of “trigger button repeated hit” by the operation system notice pattern determined using the operation system notice pattern determination table 142D, after the variable display of the decorative design is started or at the same time as the variable display is started, For example, by displaying an effect image showing the stick controller 30 and a message image such as “Let's aim and shoot!” In the display area of the image display device 5, etc. A button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to perform the operation is executed. Next, for example, by displaying the effect image of the aiming (scope) aiming at the flying airplane (enemy aircraft) so that the display position can be changed, as in the notice effect of “single trigger button”, An effect operation is performed so that the player can perform the continuous operation of the trigger button 31A while performing the tilting operation of the operation rod 30A. Each time an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected within the operation valid period, an effect image in which a shell is fired at the time of detection is displayed, and the degree of aim matching, the number of detections of the instruction operation, the detection interval, etc. are displayed. Based on this, an effect image in which the degree to which the enemy aircraft is destroyed changes is displayed. After that, when the operation valid period ends, it is only necessary that the player can be notified of the reliability by displaying an effect image indicating whether or not the enemy aircraft has been successfully shot down.

  As an example, in the operation system notice pattern YBP4-1, the enemy aircraft cannot be shot down regardless of the degree to which the shell hits the enemy aircraft, thereby notifying that the reliability is low. On the other hand, in the operation system notice pattern YBP4-2, if the enemy aircraft has been hit at least once, the enemy aircraft can be shot down, thereby notifying that the reliability is high. Alternatively, in the operation system notice pattern YBP4-2, even if the enemy aircraft is not hit, the enemy aircraft may be shot down as long as the shell is fired. On the other hand, even in the operation system notice pattern YBP4-2, when the enemy aircraft is not hit or when the number of shots is less than a predetermined number, the degree of destruction of the enemy aircraft reaches a certain level. If not, the enemy aircraft may not be shot down so that the original reliability is not notified. Thereby, the tilting operation of the operating rod 30A and the operation on the trigger button 31A can be promoted, and the player's willingness to participate in the notice effect can be improved. Similarly to the “trigger button single shot” notice effect, the player may be informed that the reliability is different by changing the type of enemy aircraft, the display mode of the enemy aircraft, and the like. The directing action in the notice effect of “triggering the trigger button” is not limited to a game that shoots down enemy aircraft, and may be an arbitrary game such as a game that captures a plurality of prey that escapes. If a plurality of cards are sequentially selected, a predetermined message having a specific meaning depending on the combination of the cards may be notified.

  The operation valid period in the notice effect that is the operation-related notice starts after the button operation promotion effect is executed, and then, for example, the decorative symbols are temporarily displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. It may be ended before the stop display is performed (before the decorative symbol variable display state becomes the reach state). Alternatively, when notifying the possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit”, the operation effective period continues until a predetermined time elapses even after the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state. Also good.

  In the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-3 to the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-8, the advance notice by either the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-1 or the operation system advance notice pattern YBP1-2 corresponding to each of the initial fluctuation and the pseudo continuous fluctuation. What is necessary is just to set so that the production | generation operation | movement according to one instruction | indication operation with respect to push button 31B may be performed by the production | presentation aspect similar to a production | presentation, or a different production | presentation aspect. Or you may make it perform the notification effect which alert | reports reliability according to one instruction | indication operation with respect to the push button 31B by a series of presentation operation | movement over the first time fluctuation | variation and pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation whole.

  In the operation system notification pattern YBP2-3 to the operation system notification pattern YBP2-8, the operation system notification pattern YBP2-1 or the operation system notification pattern YBP2-2 is notified in accordance with each of the initial variation and the pseudo continuous variation. What is necessary is just to set so that the production | generation operation | movement according to the continuous striking operation with respect to push button 31B may be performed by the production | presentation aspect similar to a production | presentation, or a different production | presentation aspect. Or you may make it perform the notification effect which alert | reports a reliability according to the continuous striking operation with respect to the push button 31B by the series of production | presentation operation | movement over the whole of first time fluctuation | variation and pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation.

  In the operation system notification pattern YBP3-3 to the operation system notification pattern YBP3-8, the operation system notification pattern YBP3-1 or the operation system notification pattern YBP3-2 is notified in accordance with each of the initial variation and the pseudo continuous variation. What is necessary is just to set so that the production | generation operation | movement according to tilting operation of the operating rod 30A and one instruction | indication operation with respect to the trigger button 31A may be performed by the production | presentation aspect different from a production | presentation, or a different production | presentation aspect. Alternatively, by performing a series of presentation operations over the entire initial variation and pseudo-continuous variation, a notification effect may be performed to notify the reliability in accordance with the tilting operation of the operation rod 30A or one instruction operation on the trigger button 31A. Good.

  In the operation system notification pattern YBP4-3 to the operation system notification pattern YBP4-8, the operation system notification pattern YBP4-1 or the operation system notification pattern YBP4-2 is notified in accordance with each of the initial variation and the pseudo continuous variation. It is only necessary to set so that the production operation according to the tilting operation of the operating rod 30A or the continuous hitting operation on the trigger button 31A is performed in the production mode similar to the production or a different production mode. Or you may make it perform the notification effect which alert | reports reliability according to the tilting operation of the operating rod 30A, or the continuous striking operation with respect to the trigger button 31A by a series of production | presentation operation | movement over the whole of first time fluctuation | variation and pseudo | simulation continuous fluctuation | variation.

  The operation system notice pattern may include a pattern that does not perform the notice effect that becomes the operation system notice in part of the initial fluctuation and the pseudo series fluctuation due to the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”. However, the reliability of the notice effect that is executed in response to the change display after the execution of the pseudo continuous change (after the re-change) is the advance notice that is executed in response to the previous change display (initial change or pseudo continuous change). It may be more than the reliability of the production. In addition, when a notice effect that becomes an operation system notice is once performed in either the initial fluctuation or the pseudo-continuous fluctuation, a notice effect that becomes an operation system notice is performed corresponding to all the pseudo-series fluctuations thereafter. Set as follows. As a result, when the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous” is executed, the expectation that the variable display result becomes “big hit” as the number of pseudo-variable increases increases, but the reliability of the notice effect is increased. It is possible to prevent a decrease in game entertainment due to a decrease in the degree and interruption of the notice effect.

  FIG. 21 shows a configuration example of the probability variation promotion effect execution determination table 143 stored in the ROM 121. When the variable display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, and the probability change promotion effect execution determination table 143 is executed, the probability change promotion is executed when the jackpot promotion effect is executed as the probability change promotion effect. It is a table referred in order to determine the timing and period when an effect is executed based on the random number SR3 for determining the probable promotion effect. In the probability change promotion effect execution time determination table 143, numerical values (decision values) to be compared with the random value SR3 for the probability change promotion effect determination are, for example, “third round”, “sixth round”, “ninth round”, “ It is assigned at the time of executing the promotion effect, which is a plurality of predetermined execution periods, such as “12th round”, “15th round”, “during ending”. In the probability variation promotion effect execution time determination table 143, the allocation of the decision value for each promotion effect execution is varied depending on whether the jackpot promotion effect to be executed is a promotion failure effect or a promotion success effect. May be. In this case, it is possible to vary the possibility (expected degree) of being notified that the promotion success effect is in a probable change state according to the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect is executed.

  FIG. 22 shows a configuration example of the probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121. In this embodiment, as the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table, the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (at the time of promotion failure) 144A shown in FIG. 22A and the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (promotion) shown in FIG. 144B at the time of success) is prepared in advance. The probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (at the time of promotion failure) 144A is a table that is referred to in order to determine the probability change promotion effect pattern as one of a plurality of types when the jackpot mid-promotion failure effect is executed as the probability change promotion effect. is there. The probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table (at the time of successful promotion) 144B is a table that is referred to in order to determine a probability variation promotion effect pattern as one of a plurality of types when a jackpot promotion success effect is executed as a probability variation promotion effect. is there.

  In the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (at the time of promotion failure) 144A, the probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP1-1, the probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP1-2, the probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP1-1, and the probability change promotion are performed according to the execution of a plurality of types of promotion effects. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR4 for determining the probability variation promotion effect pattern is assigned to one of the effect patterns ZBP1-2. Therefore, the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZAP1-1, the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZAP1-2, the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZBP1-1, and the probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP1-2 are all the probability change promotion corresponding to the effect mode in the jackpot promotion promotion effect. It is a production pattern.

  In the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (at the time of successful promotion) 144B, the probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP2-1, the probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP2-2, the probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP2-1, and the probability change promotion are performed according to the execution of a plurality of types of promotion effects. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR4 for determining the probability variation promotion effect pattern is assigned to one of the effect patterns ZBP2-2. Therefore, the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZAP2-1, the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZAP2-2, the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZBP2-1, and the probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP2-2 are all the probability change promotion corresponding to the effect mode in the successful promotion during the big hit. It is a production pattern.

  In the probability change promotion effect by the probability change promotion effect pattern determined using the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (when promotion is failed) 144A and the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (when promotion is successful) 144B, the same as the notice effect of the operation system advance notice What is necessary is just to perform as production | presentation operation | movement or part or all different production | presentation operation | movement. As an example, the probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP1-1 and the probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP2-1 are similar to the operation system notice pattern YBP1-1 and the operation system notice pattern YBP1-2 in that a game using roulette is performed. The roulette is provided with a frame of probability variation symbols and non-probability variation symbols, and it is only necessary to perform an effect operation different from these operation system notice patterns. In the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZAP1-1, a bow and arrow hits the frame of the non-probability variation symbol when an operation is detected, thereby notifying that there is no probability variation promotion. On the other hand, in the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZAP2-1, It is only necessary to notify that there is a certain degree of promotion by hitting a bow and arrow. Note that other games and message notifications may be performed.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a list of stop symbol notice effect patterns. The variation pattern determined on the main substrate 11 side is a non-reach loss pattern (for example, variation patterns PA1-1, PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4, PB1-1, PB1-2 shown in FIG. 7). Correspondingly, stop symbol notice effect patterns TZP1-1, TZP1-2, and TZP1-3 are prepared. The stop symbol preview effect pattern TZP1-1 is displayed only in the decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R with the left and right decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R or the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. This is a stop symbol notice effect pattern. In the stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP1-2, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, or the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R are displayed with a warning symbol that does not constitute a reach or chance eye. It is a stop symbol notice effect pattern in which a button operation promotion effect is executed after being performed. When the button operation promotion effect is being executed, if a predetermined number of operations have been performed, it is changed to another notice symbol that does not constitute a reach. The stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP1-3 is displayed after the notice symbol constituting the reach is displayed only in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R or the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. This is a stop symbol notice effect pattern in which a button operation promotion effect is executed. When the button operation promotion effect is being executed, if a predetermined number of operations have been performed, the notice symbol is changed to a notice symbol constituting a pseudo-continuous chance. In the case where the notice symbol is displayed only in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol and the “right” decorative symbol are displayed when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. By combining with the notice symbol displayed in the symbol display area 5R, a special display mode such as reach or chance can be announced.

  A variation pattern determined on the side of the main substrate 11 is accompanied by reach (for example, variation patterns PA2-1, PA2-2, PB3-1, PB3-2, PA4-1, PA4-2, PB5- shown in FIG. 7). 1 and PB5-2), stop symbol notice effect patterns TZP2-1 and TZP2-2 are prepared. The stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP2-1 is a stop symbol notice effect pattern on which the notice symbols constituting the reach are displayed. The stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP2-2 is a stop symbol notice effect pattern in which a button operation promotion effect is executed after a notice symbol that does not constitute a reach or chance is displayed. When the button operation promotion effect is being executed, if there is a predetermined number of operations, the notice symbol is changed to the notice symbol that constitutes the reach.

  A variation pattern determined on the main substrate 11 side is accompanied by a “pseudo-ream” (for example, variation patterns PA1-5, PB2-1, PB2-2, PA3-1, PA3-2, PB4-1 shown in FIG. 7). , PB4-2, PA5-1, PA5-2, PC1-3), stop symbol notice effect patterns TZP3-1, TZP3-2, and TZP3-3 are prepared. The stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP3-1 is a stop symbol notice effect pattern in which a notice symbol constituting a pseudo-continuous chance is displayed. The stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP3-2 is a stop symbol notice effect pattern in which a button operation promotion effect is executed after a notice symbol that does not constitute a reach or chance is displayed. When the button operation promotion effect is being executed, if a predetermined number of operations have been performed, the notice symbol is changed to a notice symbol constituting a pseudo-continuous chance. The stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP3-3 is a stop symbol notice effect pattern in which the button operation promotion effect is executed after the notice symbol constituting the reach is displayed. When the button operation promotion effect is being executed, if a predetermined number of operations have been performed, the notice symbol is changed to a notice symbol constituting a pseudo-continuous chance.

  The variation pattern determined on the main substrate 11 side corresponds to “probability” or “small hit” (for example, variation patterns PC1-1, PC1-2, PC1-4, PC1-5 shown in FIG. 7). Correspondingly, stop symbol notice effect patterns TZP4-1 and TZP4-2 are prepared. The stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP4-1 is a stop symbol notice effect pattern on which the notice symbols constituting the chance of chance of success are displayed. The stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP4-2 is a stop symbol notice effect pattern in which a button operation promotion effect is executed after a notice symbol that does not constitute a reach or chance is displayed. When the button operation promotion effect is being executed, if there is a predetermined number of operations, the notice symbol is changed to a notice symbol that constitutes a chance of chance.

  FIG. 24 shows a configuration example of the stop symbol notice effect execution determination table 145 stored in the ROM 121. The stop symbol advance notice execution determination table 145 is a table that is referred to in order to determine whether or not to execute the stop symbol advance notice effect based on the random number SR5 for determining stop symbol advance notice execution. In the stop symbol notice effect execution determination table 145, the fluctuation patterns are “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “big hit” (without pseudo-ream), “big hit” (with pseudo-ream), “surprise”, “small hit”. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random number value SR5 for determining stop symbol notice effect execution is assigned to “executed” or “not executed” depending on which one corresponds to. In the stop symbol advance notice execution determination table 145, the stop symbol advance notice effect is more easily executed than when the variable display result is “big hit” and “lost”. Also, the stop symbol notice effect is more easily executed when “Leach Loss” than when it is “Non-Leach Loss”. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is easier to execute when the pseudo-ream is accompanied.

  FIG. 25 shows a configuration example of a stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table stored in the ROM 121. In this embodiment, as the stop symbol advance notice effect pattern determination table, the stop symbol advance notice effect pattern determination table (no pseudo-continuous) 146A shown in FIG. 25A and the stop symbol advance notice effect pattern determination shown in FIG. A table (with pseudo-continuations) 146B is prepared in advance. The stop symbol advance notice effect pattern determination table (without pseudo-ream) 146A is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of stop symbol advance notice effect patterns in the case of a variation pattern not accompanied by a pseudo ream. The stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table (with pseudo-ream) 146B is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of a plurality of types of stop symbol advance notice effect patterns when the change pattern is accompanied by a pseudo ream. Further, in the stop symbol notice effect pattern determination table (without pseudo-ream) 146A and the stop symbol notice effect pattern determination table (with pseudo-ream) 146B, the variation patterns are “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “hit” (No pseudo-ream), “Big hit” (with pseudo-ream), “Sudden accuracy”, “Small hit” are supported, and the stop symbol notice effect pattern is decided. Yes.

  In the stop symbol notice effect pattern determination table (without pseudo-ream) 146A, the stop symbol notice effect patterns TZP1-1, TZP1-2, and TZP1-3 are corresponding to the non-reach loss variation pattern not involving the pseudo-ream. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR6 for determining the stop symbol notice effect pattern is assigned to either. Note that the stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP1-3 is a decorative symbol (for example, “1” indicating the same number in the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C as the final stop symbol of non-reach loss. "1" "5" or a combination of "7" "7" "4", etc.) can be selected only when it is determined to be derived and displayed. Further, in the stop symbol advance notice effect pattern determination table (without pseudo-ream) 146A, either the stop symbol advance notice effect pattern TZP2-1 or TZP2-2 corresponds to the reach loss or the big hit variation pattern without the pseudo ream. In addition, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR6 for determining the stop symbol notice effect pattern is assigned. In the case of a big hit, it is easier to determine the stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP2-2 in which the button operation promotion effect is executed than in the case of reach lose. In addition, in the stop symbol advance notice effect pattern determination table (without pseudo-ream) 146A, the stop symbol advance notice effect patterns TZP4-1 and TZP4-2 are associated with the fact that it is a small hit or sudden variation pattern without a pseudo ream. A numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR6 for determining the stop symbol notice effect pattern is assigned to either.

  In the stop symbol advance notice pattern determination table (with pseudo-ream) 146B, the fluctuation pattern corresponds to any of “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “big hit”, “surprise”, “small hit” with pseudo-ream Depending on whether or not, a numerical value (decision value) to be compared with the random value SR6 for determining the stop symbol advance notice pattern is assigned to any one of the stop symbol advance notice patterns TZP3-1, TZP3-2, or TZP3-3. ing. In the setting of the stop symbol notice effect pattern determination table (with pseudo-ream) 146B, the stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP3-3 is determined only when the “reach lose” or “big hit” is reached. The stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP3-3 is a stop symbol notice effect pattern that suggests that it will be a quasi-continuous chance after suggesting that it will be reach. In order to avoid such a situation, the player will be distrusted if he / she has suggested that he / she will once reach reach, but the stop symbol / predictive effect of the stop symbol / predictive effect pattern TZP3-3 is When it is executed, it reaches after that. Note that the stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP3-3 is determined at a higher rate when the “big hit” is reached than when the “reach lose”. With such a setting, the possibility (reliability) of becoming a “hit” when the stop symbol notice effect of the stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP3-3 is executed increases.

  FIG. 26A shows a configuration example of the required operation number determination table 147 stored in the ROM 121. The required operation count determination table 147 requires the number of operations (pressing the push button 31B) necessary to change the preview symbol when the stop symbol preview effect pattern for executing the button operation promotion effect is determined to be required. It is a table referred to in order to determine based on random number value SR7 for frequency determination. In the required operation count determination table 147, the fluctuation pattern is any one of “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “big hit” (without pseudo-ream), “big hit” (with pseudo-ream), “surprise”, “small hit”. A numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR7 for determining the required number of operations is assigned to “10 times” or “15 times” depending on whether it corresponds. In the required operation count determination table 147, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is easier to determine “10 times” than when there is “losing”, and it is easy to change the notice symbol. In addition, when “Leach Loss” is indicated, “10 times” is more likely to be determined than when it is “Non-Leach Loss”. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is more likely to be determined “10 times” when the pseudo-ream is accompanied, and it is easy to change the notice symbol. That is, if the number of operations (pushing the push button 31B) necessary for changing the notice symbol is small, the reach ratio and the reliability that the variable display result is “big hit” is high. Thus, since the player can recognize the reliability by operating, the player's willingness to operate the operation means (push button 31B) can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

  FIG. 26B shows a configuration example of the notice symbol number determination table 148 stored in the ROM 121. The notice symbol number determination table 148 is a table that is referred to in order to determine the number of notice symbols to be displayed when executing the stop symbol notice effect based on the random number value SR8 for determining the number of notice symbols. In the notice symbol number determination table 148, the fluctuation pattern is any of “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “big hit” (without pseudo-ream), “big hit” (with pseudo-ream), “surprise”, “small hit”. Depending on whether it corresponds, the numerical value (determined value) to be compared with the random number SR8 for determining the number of notice symbols is “right only” (only “right” decorative symbol display area 5R) or “left “Right” (“Left” and “Right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5R). In the notice symbol number determination table 148, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is easier to determine “left / right” than when it is “lost”, and the number of notice symbols tends to increase. ing. Also, when “Leach Loss” is indicated, it is easier to determine “Left / Right” than when it is “Non-Leach Loss”, and the number of notice symbols is likely to increase. Further, when the variable display result is “big hit”, it is more likely to be determined to be “left / right” when accompanied by a pseudo-ream, and the number of notice symbols tends to increase.

  The ROM 121 stores in advance a plurality of types of pattern data constituting an effect control pattern used by the effect control CPU 120 to control various effect operations. Such effect control patterns may include, for example, the symbol variation control pattern shown in FIG. 27, the notice effect control pattern shown in FIGS. 28 and 29, the probability change promotion effect control pattern shown in FIG.

  The symbol variation control pattern relates to a variable display operation of the decorative symbol in the display area of the image display device 5 in a period from when the decorative symbol variable display is started to when the final decorative symbol which is the final stop symbol is stopped and displayed. What is necessary is just to be comprised in advance by the pattern data etc. which show the content of control, and for every variation pattern of a decoration design. Further, different symbol variation control patterns may be prepared corresponding to a plurality of types of effect modes in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Each of the plurality of symbol variation control patterns includes a decorative symbol display position and a decorative symbol display position in a variable symbol display performed using a final symbol that is a final stop symbol, a temporary stop symbol that is temporarily stopped during variable display, and the like. It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as the size, the direction of variation of the decorative pattern, and the variation speed. Here, the final stop symbol, the temporary stop symbol, etc. are determined at the start of variable display based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. If it is.

  The notice effect control pattern is composed of pattern data indicating the control content of the effect operation in the notice effect, and may be prepared in advance for each of the notice effect patterns according to the contents of the effect operation in the notice effect. For example, the plurality of notice effect control patterns are classified into display type notice types, such as a notice effect control pattern corresponding to the display type notice type shown in FIG. 28, for example, “character display”, “step-up display”, and the like. In accordance with one of the multiple display system notice patterns prepared in advance for executing the notice effect, the one specifying the time schedule such as the display position and size of the effect image and the update display procedure is included. Just do it. Also, the plurality of notice effect control patterns are classified into operation type notice types, such as a notice effect control pattern corresponding to the operation type notice type shown in FIG. , Display position and size of the effect image, update display corresponding to any of the plurality of operation-related notice patterns prepared in advance to execute the notice effect such as “single trigger button” and “trigger trigger button” It is only necessary to define a time schedule such as a procedure, a setting of an operation effective period for effectively detecting an operation action by a player, and a setting for switching an effect operation when an operation is detected. In addition to these, a notice effect control pattern corresponding to each stop symbol notice effect pattern of the stop symbol notice effect is also prepared.

  The probability change promotion effect control pattern is composed of pattern data indicating the control contents of the effect operation in the probability change promotion effect, and a plurality of probability change promotion effect patterns corresponding to the contents of the effect operation in the probability change promotion effect are prepared in advance. That's fine. For example, each of the plurality of probability change promotion effect control patterns includes the display position and size of the effect image, the update display procedure, the setting of the operation effective period for effectively detecting the operation action by the player, and the setting of the effect operation switching at the time of detecting the operation. It suffices if the time schedule is specified.

  Of the probability change promotion effect control patterns shown in FIG. 30, the probability change promotion effect control pattern SUA1-1 corresponds to the probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP1-1, and the probability change promotion effect control pattern SUB1-1 is the probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP1-. Corresponding to 1, it is composed of process data for executing a probability change promotion effect of “single push button”. The probability change promotion effect control pattern SUA1-2 corresponds to the probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP1-2, and the probability change promotion effect control pattern SUB1-2 corresponds to the probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP1-2. It consists of process data for executing the probable promotion effect. The probability change promotion effect control pattern SUA2-1 corresponds to the probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP2-1, and the probability change promotion effect control pattern SUB2-1 corresponds to the probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP2-1. It consists of process data for executing the probable promotion effect. The probability change promotion effect control pattern SUA2-2 corresponds to the probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP2-2, and the probability change promotion effect control pattern SUB2-2 corresponds to the probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP2-2. It consists of process data for executing the probable promotion effect.

  FIG. 31A shows a configuration example of each such effect control pattern. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 31A, the effect control pattern includes various effect operations such as an effect control process timer determination value, display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, operation detection control data, and an end code. It is composed of process data serving as control data for control, and it is only necessary to set the contents of various effects control, timing control switching timing, and the like in time series.

  The effect control process timer determination value is a value (determination value) to be compared with an effect control process timer value that is a stored value of the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 shown in FIG. A determination value corresponding to the execution time (production time) of the production operation is set in advance. In place of the effect control process timer determination value, for example, a predetermined effect control command is received from the main board 11, or a predetermined process is executed as a process for controlling the effect operation in the effect control CPU 120. The data indicating the switching timing of effect control or the like may be set corresponding to predetermined control content or processing content.

  The display control data includes data indicating the display mode of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5, such as data indicating the variation mode of each decorative pattern during variable display of the decorative pattern. That is, the display control data is data that designates the display operation of the effect image in the display area of the image display device 5. The voice control data includes data indicating the voice output mode from the speakers 8L and 8R, such as data indicating the output mode of sound effects in conjunction with the variable display operation of the decorative symbol during variable display of the decorative symbol, for example. Yes. That is, the audio control data is data that designates an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R. The lamp control data includes data indicating a lighting operation mode of the light emitter, such as a game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED. That is, the lamp control data is data for designating the lighting operation of the light emitter.

  The operation detection control data includes, for example, an operation valid period for effectively detecting the tilting operation with respect to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A, or the operation validity for effectively detecting the instruction operation with respect to the push button 31B. Data indicating an effect operation mode according to the player's operation action is included, such as data specifying the period and the control content of the effect operation when each operation is detected effectively. Here, the operation detection control data is limited so that the instruction operation for the push button 31B is not detected in the operation valid period in which the tilt operation for the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the instruction operation for the trigger button 31A are detected effectively ( It is only necessary to be set to prohibit. Further, the operation detection control data limits (prohibits) the detection of the tilting operation with respect to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the detection of the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A in the operation effective period in which the instruction operation with respect to the push button 31B is effectively detected. ) As long as it is set.

  Note that these control data do not have to be included in all the effect control patterns, but an effect control pattern configured to include a part of the control data according to the contents of the effect operation by each effect control pattern. There may be. Further, in the plural types of process data included in the effect control pattern, the types of control data constituting each process data may be different according to the contents of the effect operation executed at each timing. That is, there may be process data configured to include all of the display control data, sound control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data, or process data configured to include a part of these. Further, for example, various other control data such as movable member control data indicating an operation mode of the movable member included in the effect accessory may be included.

  FIG. 31 (B) shows various effect operations executed according to the contents of the effect control pattern. The production control CPU 120 determines the control content of the production operation according to various control data included in the production control pattern. For example, when the production control process timer value matches one of the production control process timer determination values, the decorative design is displayed in a manner specified by the display control data associated with the production control process timer determination value, and the character Control is performed to display an effect image such as an image or a background image in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, control is performed to output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R in a manner specified by the sound control data, and control is performed to flash a light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the lamp control data. Control is performed to accept the operation of the stick controller 30 on the operation rod 30A, the trigger button 31A, or the push button 31B in the operation valid period specified by the detection control data and determine the content of the effect. Note that dummy data (data not specifying control) may be set as data corresponding to a production component that does not become a control target even though it corresponds to the production control process timer determination value.

  The effect control CPU 120 sets the effect control pattern based on the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, when starting variable display of decorative symbols. Here, when setting the effect control pattern, the pattern data constituting the corresponding effect control pattern may be read from the ROM 121 and temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, or the corresponding effect control pattern is configured. The storage address of the pattern data in the ROM 121 may be temporarily stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and the reading position of the storage data in the ROM 121 may be designated. After that, every time the production control process timer value is updated, it is determined whether or not it matches any of the production control process timer judgment values. If they match, the production operation according to the corresponding various control data Control. In this way, the effect control CPU 120 performs effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps) according to the contents of process data # 1 to process data #n (n is an arbitrary integer) included in the effect control pattern. The control of the light emitter such as 9) is advanced. In each process data # 1 to process data #n, display control data # 1 to display control data #n and voice control data # 1 to voice control associated with production control process timer determination values # 1 to #n are provided. Data #n, lamp control data # 1 to lamp control data #n, and operation detection control data # 1 to operation detection control data #n indicate the control content of the rendering operation in the rendering device and specify the execution of the rendering control. Control execution data # 1 to production control execution data #n are configured.

  A command according to the effect control pattern set in this way is output from the effect control CPU 120 to the display control unit 123, the sound control board 13, and the like. In the display control unit 123 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, a predetermined VDP or the like is developed by reading out image data indicated by the command from an image data memory such as CGROM and temporarily storing it in the VRAM. On the voice control board 13 that has received a command from the effect control CPU 120, for example, the voice synthesis IC reads out the voice data indicated by the command from the voice data ROM and temporarily stores it in the voice RAM or the like. .

  The RAM 122 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. 3 is provided with an effect control data holding area 190 as shown in FIG. 32, for example, as an area for holding various data used for controlling the effect operation. ing. The effect control data holding area 190 shown in FIG. 32 includes an effect control flag setting unit 191, an effect control timer setting unit 192, an effect control counter setting unit 193, and an effect control buffer setting unit 194.

  In the effect control flag setting unit 191, for example, a plurality of types of states whose states can be updated according to the effect operation state such as the effect image display state on the display screen of the image display device 5, the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, and the like. A flag is provided. For example, the effect control flag setting unit 191 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on state or the off state for each of the plurality of types of flags.

  The effect control timer setting unit 192 is provided with a plurality of types of timers used to control the progress of various effect operations such as an effect image display operation on the display screen of the image display device 5, for example. For example, the production control timer setting unit 192 stores data indicating timer values in each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a plurality of types of counters used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the production control counter setting unit 193 stores data indicating the count value in each of a plurality of types of counters. As an example, the effect control counter setting unit 193 is provided with a random counter for counting part or all of numerical data indicating random values (effect random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the effect operation. Just do it.

  The effect control buffer setting unit 194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used for controlling the progress of various effect operations. For example, the effect control buffer setting unit 194 stores data indicating buffer values in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  The display control unit 123 mounted on the effect control board 12 shown in FIG. For example, the display control unit 123 executes various types of effect display such as variable display of decorative symbols and effect display in reach effects by determining the switching timing of effect images to be displayed on the screen of the image display device 5. Control. The display control unit 123 may be configured to include a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), an LCD drive circuit, and the like.

  The I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 or the like, various operation detection signals transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A, the push sensor 35B, and the tilt direction sensor unit 32, and the like. An input port for capturing signals and an output port for transmitting various signals to the outside of the effect control board 12 are configured. For example, from the output port of the I / O 125, a video signal transmitted to the image display device 5, a command (sound effect signal) transmitted to the sound control board 13, and a command transmitted to the lamp control board 14 (Lighting signal) etc. are output.

  On the voice control board 13, for example, an input / output driver, a voice synthesis IC, a voice data ROM, an amplifier circuit, a volume, and the like are mounted. As an example, in the voice control board 13, the sound number data indicated in the sound effect signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the voice synthesis IC via the input / output driver. The voice synthesis IC generates voice and sound effects corresponding to the sound number data and outputs them to the amplifier circuit. The amplifier circuit outputs an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the speech synthesis IC to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume to the speakers 8L and 8R. The voice data ROM stores control data corresponding to the sound number data, and the voice synthesis IC reads out the control data corresponding to the sound number data to generate voice and sound effects. The data stored in the audio data ROM may be composed of data indicating the output mode of audio and sound effects in a predetermined period in time series.

  For example, an input / output driver and a lamp driver are mounted on the lamp control board 14. As an example, in the lamp control board 14, the electrical decoration signal transmitted from the effect control board 12 is input to the lamp driver via the input / output driver. The lamp driver amplifies the electric decoration signal and supplies it to the game effect lamp 9 and the like.

  Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. When the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 performs necessary initial settings after setting the interrupt disabled. In this initial setting, for example, the RAM 101 is cleared. Also, register setting of a CTC (counter / timer circuit) built in the game control microcomputer 100 is performed. Thus, thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing. When the initial setting is completed, an interrupt is permitted and then loop processing is started. In the game control main process, a process for returning the internal state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the state at the time of the previous power supply stop may be executed before entering the loop process. When the CPU 103 that has executed such a game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and receives an interrupt request, the CPU 103 executes a game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG.

  When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 33 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, and the second start port through the switch circuit 110. The state of detection signals input from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S11). Subsequently, by executing predetermined main-side error processing, abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S12). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as jackpot information, starting information, probability variation information supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 is output (step) S13).

  Following the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers such as random number values MR1 to MR5 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S14). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S15). In the special symbol process, the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol is processed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to perform control of the display operation in the display device 4B, setting of the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S16). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED, etc.) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process, so that the variable display of the normal symbol and the normal variable winning ball apparatus 6B are movable. Enables setting of the tilting movement of the blade. After executing the normal symbol process, the CPU 103 transmits a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process (step S17). As an example, in the command control process, in response to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155, among the output ports included in the I / O 105, effect control After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. By changing the state to the off state, the presentation control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S15 shown in FIG. 33 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101). 35 and 36 are flowcharts showing an example of the start winning determination process executed in step S101.

  In the start winning determination process shown in FIGS. 35 and 36, the CPU 103 first reads the input port data stored in the predetermined input port register (step S201 in FIG. 35). Here, the input port register is a register in which, for example, a bit value indicating an input state of an external signal at an input port included in the I / O 105 is stored. In this embodiment, the input port data stored in the bit number [0] of the input port register is the input state (OFF / ON) of the first start winning signal that becomes the detection signal transmitted from the first start port switch 22A. ) And the input port data stored in the bit number [1] of the input port register is the input state of the second start winning signal (OFF / ON).

  It is determined whether or not the bit value [1] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S202). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S202; Yes), the second start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the second start winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, Update so as to count up by adding 1 (step S203). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S202 (step S202; No), the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S204).

  After executing one of the processes in steps S203 and S204, it is determined whether or not the bit value in the bit number [0] of the input port register read in step S201 is “1” (step S205). At this time, if the bit value is “1” (step S205; Yes), the first start winning determination count value that is the stored value of the first starting winning determination counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is, for example, It is updated so as to count up by adding 1 (step S206). On the other hand, when it is determined as “0” in step S205 (step S205; No), the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0”. (Step S207).

  After executing one of the processes of steps S206 and S207, it is determined whether or not the first start winning determination count value has reached a predetermined determination value (for example, “2”) that is predetermined as a winning determination value. (Step S208). At this time, if the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S208; Yes), the starting port buffer value that is the stored value of the starting port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is “1” is set (step S209). Further, the first start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S210).

  If the first start winning determination count value has not reached the winning determination value in step S208 (step S208; No), a valid game ball winning in the first start winning opening is detected by the first start opening switch 22A. In response to this, it is determined whether or not the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211). At this time, if the second start winning determination count value does not reach the winning determination value (step S211; No), a valid game ball winning to the second start winning opening is detected by the second start opening switch 22B. In response to the absence, the start winning determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value (step S211; Yes), the start port buffer value is set to “2” (step S212). Further, the second start winning determination counter is cleared and the count value is initialized to “0” (step S213).

  After executing one of the processes of Steps S210 and S213, the CPU 103 reads the pending storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (Step S214). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the first reserved memory number count value which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read, and the starting port buffer value is When it is “2”, the second reserved memory number count value that is the stored value of the second reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154 is read. Then, it is determined whether or not the read value in step S214 has reached a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”) (step S215 in FIG. 36). At this time, if the read value in step S214 does not reach the upper limit value, the starting condition for starting the variable display of the special symbol and the decorative symbol is effectively established. For example, after it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 35 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value. The first start condition for executing the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the one special symbol display device 4A and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established. When it is determined in step S211 shown in FIG. 35 that the second start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value and then it is determined in step S215 that the read value has not reached the upper limit value, The second starting condition for executing the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the two special symbol display device 4B and the variable display of the decorative symbol is established.

  Thus, when the read value has not reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; No), 1 is added to the reserved storage number count value corresponding to the start port buffer value (step S216). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, 1 is added to the first reserved memory number count value, and when the starting port buffer value is “2”, 1 is added to the second reserved memory number count value. Then, the CPU 103 adds 1 to the total pending storage number count value that is the stored value of the total pending storage number counter that indicates the total pending storage number that is the total value of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number ( Step S217).

  Subsequent to the processing of step S217, the CPU 103, among the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter, the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data indicating the random number MR3 for type determination is extracted (step S218). Numeric data indicating each random number extracted in this way is set as reserved data at the beginning of the empty entry in the special figure storage unit corresponding to the start port buffer value, thereby storing each random value (step S219). . For example, when the start port buffer value is “1”, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 is set in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, while when the start port buffer value is “2”, Numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are set in the second special figure storage unit 151B.

  After the random number value is stored in step S219, a setting is made to transmit a start opening prize designation command corresponding to the start opening buffer value to the effect control board 12 (step S220). For example, when the starting port buffer value is “1”, the storage address of the first starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the first starting port is stored. Make settings to send a winning designation command. On the other hand, when the starting port buffer value is “2”, the storage address of the second starting port winning designation command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and 2. Make settings for sending the start opening prize designation command. The start opening winning designation command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After the setting in step S220, for example, the storage address of the reserved storage number notification command table in the ROM 101 is stored in the effect control board 12 by storing it in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Settings for transmitting the number notification command are performed (step S221). For example, the reserved memory number notification command set in this way is performed from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by executing the command control process of step S17 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  When the read value has reached the upper limit value in step S215 (step S215; Yes), after executing the process of step S221, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is “1” or “2”. Determination is made (step S222). At this time, if the starting port buffer value is “1” (step S222; “1”), the starting port buffer is cleared and the stored value is initialized to “0” (step S223), and then FIG. The process proceeds to step S211 shown in FIG. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is “2” (step S222; “2”), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to “0” (step S224). The start winning determination process is terminated.

  In this embodiment, when both of the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of a game ball that is effective at the same time, both processes are executed by processing executed within 2 milliseconds. A process based on the fact that the switch has detected a start winning of a valid game ball is executed. That is, when it is determined in step S208 shown in FIG. 35 that the first start winning determination count value has reached the winning determination value, the processing of steps S209, S210, and S214 shown in FIG. After executing the processing of steps S215 to S221 shown in FIG. 35, after executing the processing of step S223 in response to the start port buffer value being “1” in step S222, the processing of step S211 shown in FIG. Proceed to processing. And when it determines with the 2nd start winning determination count value having reached the winning determination value in step S211, after performing the process of step S212-S214 shown in FIG. 35, step S215-S221 shown in FIG. After executing the above process, the process of step S224 is executed in response to the start port buffer value being “2” in step S222, and then the start winning determination process is terminated. Thereby, even when both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B detect the start winning of the game balls that are effective at the same time, the processing based on the detection of both effective start winnings can be completed reliably.

  After executing the start winning determination process in step S101 shown in FIG. Execute the process.

  The special symbol normal process in step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0”. In this special symbol normal processing, the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol are based on the presence / absence of reserved data stored in the first special symbol reservation storage unit 151A and the second special diagram reservation storage unit 151B. It is determined whether or not to start the special game using the display device 4B. In the special symbol normal process, whether or not the variable symbol display result of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is set to “big hit” or “small hit” based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result. It is determined (predetermined) before the variable display result is derived and displayed. Further, in the special symbol normal process, in response to the variable display result of the special symbol in the special symbol game, the confirmed special symbol (big hit symbol, the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B) Either a small hit symbol or a lost symbol) is set.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. This variation pattern setting process includes a process for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types based on the result of determining whether the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. Corresponding to the determination result of the pattern type, a process of determining the variation pattern as one of a plurality of types is included.

  The special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure For example, every time the special symbol variation process of step S112 is executed, the special diagram variation timer value, which is the stored value in the special diagram variation timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153, is subtracted or incremented by one. Regardless of whether the game is a special game using the first special graphic by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special game using the second special graphic by the second special symbol display device 4B, a common timer is used. The elapsed time is measured. It is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. As described above, the special symbol variation process in step S112 is performed by the first special symbol display device 4A using the first special symbol in the special symbol game or the second special symbol display device 4B. It suffices if it is a process for controlling the variation of the special symbol in the special figure game using the game by a common processing routine. When the elapsed time from the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In the special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the change of the special symbol, and the fixed special symbol which is the variable symbol display result is stopped and displayed. A process for setting is included. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag or the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on. When the big hit flag is on, the special process flag value is set to “ Update to 4 ". When the small hit flag is on, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. Further, when both the big hit flag and the small hit flag are OFF, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This big hit release pre-processing includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the big hit gaming state and setting the big winning opening to the open state based on the fact that the variable display result becomes “big hit”, etc. include. At this time, for example, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened may be set according to whether the big hit type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change”. As an example, when the big hit type is controlled to 15 rounds big hit state corresponding to “non-probability change” or “probability change”, the upper limit of the period in which the big winning opening is opened is set to “29 seconds”. In addition to the setting, the number of times of opening of the big winning opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “15 times”. On the other hand, when the big hit type is controlled to be “surprise” and is controlled to the two round big hit state, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”. At the same time, the number of times of opening of the big prize opening, which is the number of round games executed, is set to “2”.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the special winning opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the special winning opening door solenoid 82 may be executed.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit opening process, the process of determining whether or not the number of rounds in which the winning opening is in the open state has reached the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening, or the maximum number of opening of the big winning opening has been reached. In some cases, a process for performing a setting for transmitting an end designation command is included.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. In the jackpot end process, a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state is executed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. Processing that waits until time elapses and processing that performs various settings for controlling to a probable change state and a short time state corresponding to the jackpot type are included.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits is a setting for starting the execution of variable winning action in the small hit game state and opening the big winning opening based on the fact that the variable display result is “small hit”, etc. The processing to perform is included. At this time, for example, in response to the variable display result being “small hit”, the upper limit of the period during which the big winning opening is opened is set to “0.5 seconds”, and the big winning opening in the variable winning operation is set. The number of times of opening may be set to “twice”.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When returning the big prize opening to the closed state, a process for stopping the supply of the solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door may be executed.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. In this small hit end process, there is a waiting time corresponding to a period during which a presentation operation for informing the end of the small hit gaming state is performed by an effect device such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 or the like. It includes processing to wait until it has passed. Here, when the small hit gaming state is finished, the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued without changing the state of the probability change flag and the short time flag.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol normal process executed in step S110 of FIG. In the special symbol normal process shown in FIG. 37, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure is “0” (step S231). For example, in the process of step S231, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the second reserved memory number count value stored in the second reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine.

  When the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the second special figure is other than “0” in step S231 (step S231; No), the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B corresponds to the reserved number “1”. As the stored data, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out (step S232). . The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S232, for example, by subtracting and updating the second reserved memory number count value, the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure is updated to be decremented by one. In the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B, reservation data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) are stored. One entry is shifted upward (step S233). Further, in the process of step S233, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total reserved memory number count value stored in the total reserved memory number counter by one. At this time, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to “2” (step S234).

  When the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure is “0” in step S231 (step S231; Yes), the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0”. It is determined whether or not (step S235). For example, in the process of step S235, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter, and determines whether or not the read value is “0”. That's fine. As described above, the process of step S235 is executed when it is determined in step S231 that the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the second special figure is “0”, and the first special figure is used. It is determined whether or not the number of stored special game games is “0”. Therefore, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  When the number of reserved figures stored in the special figure game using the first special figure is other than “0” in step S235 (step S235; No), the first special figure reserved memory unit 151A corresponds to the reserved number “1”. As the stored data, numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type are read out (step S236). . The numerical data read at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a random number buffer for variation.

  Subsequent to the processing of step S236, for example, by updating the first reserved memory number count value by subtracting 1 and updating it, the reserved memory number of the special figure game using the first special figure is updated so as to be reduced by 1. In the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A, reservation data indicating random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) are stored. One entry is shifted upward (step S237). Further, in the process of step S237, the game control counter setting unit 154 may update the total pending storage number count value stored in the total pending storage number counter by one. At this time, the value of the variation special figure designation buffer is updated to “1” (step S238).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S234 and S238, it is determined whether to display the special figure variable display result, which is the variable symbol display result, as “big hit”, “small hit”, or “losing”. As the usage table, the special figure display result determination table 130 is selected and set (step S239). The CPU 103 refers to the special figure display result determination table 130 set in this way, so that the numerical data indicating the random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for variation is “big hit” or “small”. Whether to display the special figure display result as "big hit", "small hit", or "lose" depending on which of the decision values assigned to each special figure display result of "Bon" or "Lose" Is determined (step S240). At this time, it is determined whether or not the special figure display result determined in step S240 is “big hit” (step S241).

  If it is determined in step S241 that it is a “hit” (step S241; Yes), the big win flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S242). At this time, the big hit type determination table 131 is selected and set as a use table for determining the big hit type as one of a plurality of types (step S243). By referring to the big hit type determination table 131 set in this way, the numerical data indicating the random number MR2 for determining the big hit type stored in the random number buffer for variation becomes “non-probability change”, “probability change”, “surprise change”. Depending on which of the determined values assigned to each jackpot type is matched, it is determined whether the jackpot type is “non-probability change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step S244). Here, when the variable special figure designation buffer value is set to “2” in the process of step S234, the decision value is not assigned to the big hit type of “surprise” in the big hit type decision table 131. Therefore, the jackpot type is not determined as “surprising”. Corresponding to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, by setting a jackpot type buffer value that is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155 (step S245), the determined jackpot type Remember. As an example, if the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the big hit type buffer value may be “0”, “probable change” may be “1”, and “surprise” may be “2”.

  When it is determined in step S241 that it is not “big hit” (step S241; No), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S246). When it is determined that the game is “small hit” (step S246; Yes), the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is set to the on state (step S247).

  If it is determined in step S246 that the game is not “small hit” (step S246; No), or after performing any of the processes in steps S245 and S247, whether to control the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. A determined special symbol is set in accordance with the result of the prior determination as to whether or not, and further, the determination result of the jackpot type when the jackpot game state is set (step S248). As an example, when it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is not “small hit”, a lost symbol is obtained corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “lost”. The special symbol indicating the symbol “−” is set as the confirmed special symbol. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S246 that the special figure display result is “small hit”, the small figure corresponding to the pre-determined result indicating that the special figure display result is “small hit”. The special symbol indicating the number “2” as the symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. When it is determined in step S241 that the special figure display result is “big hit”, the big hit symbols “1”, “3”, “7” are determined according to the big hit type determination result in step S244. Any of the special symbols indicating the numbers "" is set as the confirmed special symbol. That is, according to the determination result that the big hit type is “non-probable change”, the special symbol indicating the number “3” that becomes the non-probable big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. Further, according to the determination result that the jackpot type is “probability change”, the special symbol indicating the number “7” that becomes the probability change big hit symbol is set as the confirmed special symbol. In accordance with the determination result that the big hit type is “accuracy”, the special symbol indicating the number of the big hit symbol “1” is set as the confirmed special symbol.

  After the confirmed special symbol is set in step S248, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S249), and then the special symbol normal process is terminated. . In step S235, when the number of reserved memories of the special figure game using the first special figure is “0” (step S235; Yes), after performing a predetermined demonstration display setting (step S250), the special symbol is set. Normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating demonstration display (demonstration screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the image display device 5 is effect control from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not transmission to the substrate 12 has been completed. At this time, if the transmission has been completed, the demonstration display setting is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of the variation pattern setting process executed in step S111 of FIG. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 38, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (step S261). If the big hit flag is on (step S261; Yes), the big hit variation pattern type determination table 132A is selected and set as a use table for determining the variation pattern type as one of a plurality of types (step S262). ). Further, for example, by reading the jackpot type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155, it is specified whether the jackpot type is “non-probable change”, “probability change”, or “surprise change” (step S263). ).

  When the big hit flag is off in step S261 (step S261; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S264). If the small hit flag is on (step S264; Yes), the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation pattern types ( Step S265).

  When the small hit flag is off in step S264 (step S264; No), for example, by determining whether or not the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 152 is on, the probability variation state or time reduction is determined. In the state, it is determined whether or not the vehicle is in the high base where the time reduction control or the high opening control is performed (step S266). At this time, if the gaming state is not in the high base (step S266; No), the gaming state is determined by, for example, determining whether or not the probability variation flag provided in the gaming control flag setting unit 152 is on. It is determined whether or not the latent probability changing state that is in the probability changing state is not in the high base (step S267).

  If the game state is not in the latent probability change in step S267 (step S267; No), the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. 133A is selected and set (step S268). Further, when the gaming state is in the high base in step S266 (step S266; Yes), the lost variation pattern type determination table (high) is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. Base) 133B is selected and set (step S269). If the gaming state is changing the latent probability in step S267 (step S267; Yes), the lost variation pattern type determination table (latent probability changing in progress) is used as a use table for determining one of a plurality of variation pattern types. ) 133C is selected and set (step S270).

  After executing any of the processes of steps S263, S265, and S268 to S270, for example, based on numerical data indicating a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern type stored in a random number buffer for variation or the like, By referring to the set variation pattern type determination table, the variation pattern type is determined as one of a plurality of types (step S271). Here, in the process of step S271, the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the establishment of the first start condition is determined. Whether or not to determine the variation pattern type of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the fact that the second start condition is satisfied. First, using the numerical data indicating the common random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern type updated by a common random counter or the like, the variation pattern type may be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. it can. The numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the variation pattern type may not be extracted at the time of starting winning when the game ball that has passed (entered) the first starting winning opening or the second starting winning opening is detected, For example, it may be extracted from the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154 when the process of step S271 is executed.

  After the variation pattern type is determined in step S271, the loss variation pattern determination table 134A and the hit variation pattern determination are performed depending on whether the special figure display result is “lost”, “big hit”, or “small hit”. One of the tables 134B is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (step S272). Subsequently, the variation pattern is determined as one of a plurality of types by referring to the variation pattern determination table set in step S272 based on the numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern (step S273). The numerical data indicating the random value MR4 for determining the variation pattern may be extracted from the random number circuit 104, the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154, or the like when the process of step S273 is executed, or the first start winning prize The first special figure reservation storage unit 151A and the second special figure reservation memory together with the random numbers MR1 to MR3 are extracted at the start winning time when the game ball that has passed (entered) through the mouth and the second start winning opening is detected. You may memorize | store as pending data in the part 151B.

  In the process of step S273, whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the first special symbol is determined by the first special symbol display device 4A based on the fact that the first start condition is satisfied, Regardless of whether the variation pattern of the decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol game executed by using the second special symbol is determined by the second special symbol display device 4B based on the establishment of the second starting condition, a common random Using the numerical data indicating the common random number MR4 that is used for determining the variation pattern updated by a counter or the like, the variation pattern can be determined as one of a plurality of types by a common processing module. Further, in the process of step S273, regardless of the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S271, a plurality of types of variation patterns are generated by a common processing module using numerical data indicating the common random number value MR4 for determining the variation pattern. Either can be determined.

  After the change pattern is determined in step S273, a special figure change time which is a variable symbol display time corresponding to the change pattern determination result is set (step S274). Thereafter, according to the variable special symbol designation buffer value, the special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A and the special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. The setting for starting the variation of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the above (step S275). As an example, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “1”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special symbol designation buffer value is “2”, a setting for transmitting a drive signal for updating the display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the process of step S275, settings for transmitting various commands for starting the special symbol change are performed (step S276). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a first variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, setting data indicating a storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first variation start command table prepared in advance is provided in the game control buffer setting unit 155. In the designated transmission command buffer, the data is stored in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends a gaming state designation command, a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the notification command and the pending storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the second variation start command table prepared in advance is a buffer designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Store in the area. When the setting in step S274 is performed, every time the command control process in step S17 shown in FIG. 33 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 applies to the effect control board 12. A gaming state designation command, a first variation start command or a second variation start command, a variation pattern designation command, a variable display result notification command, and a pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. The order in which these effect control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after the variable display result notification command is transmitted first, the first variation start command, the second variation start command, or the variation pattern designation command is transmitted. The game state designation command and the pending storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order. Thereafter, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step S277), and then the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol stop process executed in step S113 of FIG. In the special symbol stop process shown in FIG. 39, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not a special figure fixed display flag provided in, for example, the game control flag setting unit 152 is on (step S291). Here, the special figure fixed display flag is set to the on state by the process of step S295 described later in response to the fixed special symbol that is the variable display result in the special figure game being derived and displayed.

  When the special figure fixed display flag is OFF in step S291 (step S291; No), settings for deriving and displaying the fixed special symbol are performed (step S292). At this time, a setting for transmitting a decorative symbol stop command to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S293). Also, a predetermined time (for example, 1000 milliseconds) is set as the special figure confirmation display time (step S294). For example, in the process of step S294, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the special figure confirmation display time may be set in the game control process timer provided in the game control timer setting unit 153. Then, after the special figure confirmation display flag is set to the on state (step S295), the special symbol stop process is terminated. Thus, after the fixed special symbol is derived and displayed by the process of step S292, the special symbol process processing according to the occurrence of the timer interrupt is performed until the special symbol fixed display time set in step S294 elapses. Each time the stop process is executed, it is determined in step S291 that the special figure fixed display flag is on.

  If the special figure confirmation display flag is ON in step S291 (step S291; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed (step S296). For example, in the process of step S296, the game control process timer value that is the stored value of the game control process timer in which the timer initial value is set by the process of step S294 is read, and whether or not the timer value has become “0”. Accordingly, it may be determined whether or not the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed. If the timer value is a value other than “0”, the game control process timer value is updated so that 1 is subtracted every time the game control timer interrupt process is executed based on the occurrence of the timer interrupt. That's fine. If the special figure confirmation display time has not elapsed in step S296 (step S296; No), the special symbol stop process is terminated to wait until the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed.

  When the special figure confirmation display time has elapsed in step S296 (step S296; Yes), after clearing the special figure confirmation display flag to turn it off (step S297), it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is on. Determination is made (step S298). At this time, if the big hit flag is on (step S298; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a big hit start production waiting time (step S299). In addition, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S300). For example, in the process of step S300, setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the hit start specifying command table prepared in advance for transmitting the hit start specifying command corresponding to the big hit type buffer value is transmitted in the transmission command buffer. What is necessary is just to store in the buffer area | region designated with the pointer.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S300, the big hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S301). In addition, a setting for ending the probability variation state and the time reduction state is performed (step S302). For example, as the processing in step S302, processing for clearing the probability variation flag and the time-short flag to turn off, processing for clearing the time-count counter for counting the remaining number of special game executed in the high base, etc. May be executed. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4”, which is a value corresponding to the big hit release pre-processing (step S303), and then the special symbol stop process is terminated.

  When the big hit flag is off in step S298 (step S298; No), it is determined whether or not the small hit flag is on (step S304). At this time, if the small hit flag is on (step S304; Yes), a predetermined time is set as a small hit start production waiting time (step S305). Subsequently, a setting for transmitting a hit start designation command corresponding to the special figure display result being “small hit” from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 is performed (step S306). Thereafter, the small hit flag is cleared and turned off (step S307). Also, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”, which is a value corresponding to the pre-opening process for small hits (step S308).

  If the small hit flag is OFF in step S304 (step S304; No), the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S309). After performing either of the processes of steps S308 and S309, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control or the high opening control in the high base is to be ended (step S310), and then the special symbol stop process is ended. . For example, in the process of step S310, when the time reduction flag is on, the time reduction count value which is the stored value of the time reduction counter is updated by subtracting 1 for example. Then, it is determined whether or not the updated short time count value matches a predetermined short time end determination value (for example, “0” or the like). At this time, if it coincides with the time reduction end determination value, the time reduction control or the high release control in the high base may be ended by clearing the time reduction flag and turning it off. On the other hand, if it does not coincide with the time reduction end determination value, the state of the time reduction flag may be maintained and the process of step S310 may be ended. It should be noted that even when the gaming state is the probability change state, if the time reduction flag is on, it is determined whether or not the time reduction control is to be ended, and the time reduction control may be ended based on the determination result of the end. Thus, while the time-shortening control is ended, the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”, or until a predetermined number of special game is executed. As a result, the gaming state can be changed to the latent probability. Alternatively, for the probability change state in which the time reduction flag is on and the probability change flag is on, the time reduction control may be continuously performed until the variable display result becomes “big hit”.

  In the process of step S310, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for probability variation control termination determination is extracted from a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 154, and probability variation control termination determination stored in the ROM 101 or the like in advance is performed. It may be determined whether or not the probability variation control is ended by referring to the table or when the number of executions of the special figure game during the probability variation control reaches a predetermined probability variation end determination value. On the other hand, in the process of step S310, the process for ending the probability variation control may not be executed, and the probability variation control may be continued until the next variable display result becomes “big hit”. Alternatively, the process for determining whether or not to end the probability variation control based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for determining the probability variation control end is determined (predetermined), for example, in step S240 shown in FIG. It may be executed before.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing an example of the jackpot end process executed in step S117 of FIG. In the jackpot end process shown in FIG. 40, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed (step S321). As an example, in the big hit release post-processing in step S116 shown in FIG. 34, when the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “7”, a timer initial value determined in advance corresponding to the big hit end presentation waiting time is set. Set to the game control process timer. In this case, in the process of step S321, for example, the game control process timer value is updated by subtracting 1 or the like, and the updated game control process timer value matches a predetermined waiting time elapsed determination value (for example, “0” or the like). Whether or not the big hit end production waiting time has elapsed may be determined according to whether or not the game has been done. If the big hit end presentation waiting time has not elapsed in step S321 (step S321; No), the big hit end processing is ended as it is.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end presentation waiting time has elapsed in step S321 (step S321; Yes), the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit 155 is read (step S322). , It is specified whether the big hit type is "non-probability change", "probability change", or "surprise change". At this time, it is determined whether or not the identified jackpot type is “uncertain change” (step S323).

  When it is determined in step S323 that the big hit type is “non-probable change” (step S323; Yes), a setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the short-time state is performed (step S324). For example, the CPU 103 sets the time reduction flag to the on state, and sets a predetermined count initial value (for example, “100”) corresponding to the upper limit value of the special figure game that can be executed in the time reduction state to the time reduction counter Set to. On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit type is “probability change” or “probability” (step S323; No), setting for starting the control for changing the gaming state to the probability change state is performed (step S325). For example, the CPU 103 sets both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag to the on state.

  It should be noted that settings may be made for controlling the probability variation state of different types depending on whether the jackpot type is determined to be “probability change” or the case where the jackpot type is determined to be “probability”. As an example, if the jackpot type is determined to be “probability change”, both the probability change flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, the initial value of the time reduction count value is not set, and the special figure display result is It is set so that both the probability variation control and the time reduction control are continuously performed until the “big hit” is reached. On the other hand, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise accuracy”, both the probability variation flag and the time reduction flag are set to the on state, and the initial value of the time reduction count value is the same as in the case of controlling to the time reduction state The probability variation control is continuously performed until the special figure display result becomes “big hit”, while the time reduction control is continued until the number of executions of the special figure game reaches a predetermined number (for example, “100”). You may set as follows. Alternatively, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprise accuracy”, if the predetermined short-and-short-term accuracy flag is on, the setting for starting the short-time control is performed together with the probability variation control, while the short- and middle-range accuracy flag is off. If there is, a setting for starting only the probability variation control may be performed. Here, for example, when it is determined in step S298 shown in FIG. 39 that the big hit flag is on, the big hit type is “probable” and the short time flag is on. Corresponding to the control being performed, the on state may be set. Alternatively, for example, when the big hit type is determined to be “surprising” in step S244 shown in FIG. When started, the short / medium rush accuracy flag may be set to the on state.

  After executing one of the processes in steps S324 and S325, the special figure process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S326), and then the jackpot end process is terminated.

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S16 of FIG. 33 as normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process shown in FIG. 41, the CPU 103 first executes a gate passage determination process (step S130). For example, in the gate passage determination process in step S130, it is determined whether the gate switch 21 is on based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21, and if it is off, the gate passage determination process ends. On the other hand, when the gate switch 21 is on, a general-purpose reserved storage count value indicating the number of general-purpose reserved storage, which is the number of reserved data stored in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 151C, is previously set as a general-purpose reserved upper limit value. It is determined whether or not the value is a predetermined value (for example, “4”). At this time, if the usual figure holding upper limit value has been reached, the passage of the current game ball at the passing gate is invalidated and the gate passing determination process is terminated. On the other hand, if the usual figure hold upper limit value is not reached, for example, random numbers for updating the usual figure display result are selected from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 or the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 154. Numerical data indicating the numerical value MR5 is extracted. The numerical data indicating the random value MR5 extracted at this time is set as reserved data at the head of the empty entry in the general-purpose reserved storage unit 151C, whereby the random value MR5 is stored. In this case, after updating so as to add 1 to the usual reserved memory number count value, the gate passage determination process is terminated.

  After executing the gate passage determination process in step S130, the CPU 103 selects one of the processes in steps S140 to S143 shown in FIG. And run.

  The normal symbol normal process in step S140 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “0”. In this normal symbol normal process, it is determined whether or not to start the normal symbol game by the normal symbol indicator 20 based on the presence or absence of the holding data stored in the normal symbol holding memory 151C. At this time, for example, when there is pending data stored in the universal figure storage unit 151C, the universal figure display result, which is a variable display result of the normal symbol in the usual figure game, is set to “per common figure” or “normal figure” After the general map display result determination process for determining whether to “miss” is performed, the value of the general map process flag is updated to “1”.

  In the general map display result determination process, a predetermined general map display result determination table is referred to based on numerical data indicating a random value MR5 for determining the general map display result included in the reserved data read from the general map storage unit 151C. The general map display result is determined. Here, in the common map display result determination table, when the time reduction flag is on, the ratio of the decision to make the general map display result “per map” is higher than when the time reduction flag is off. In addition, the determined value is assigned to the normal map display result. As a result, the variable display result of the normal symbol in the normal game is more likely to be “per normal map” in the special game state such as in the high base where the short time control and the high opening control are performed in the probability change state and the short time state compared to the normal state. As a result, the frequency at which the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is expanded and opened is increased, and the game ball easily passes (enters) the second starting winning opening.

  In the general map display result determination process, the general map change time corresponding to the general map display result is also determined. At this time, when the time reduction flag is on, the normal time fluctuation time is set to be shorter than when the time reduction flag is off. As a result, in a special game state such as during a high base where time-shortening control or high-opening control is performed in the probability variation state or time-shortening state, the interval for deriving and displaying the normal symbol variable display result in the normal game is shortened. The interval at which the variable display result of “per standard” is derived and displayed is shortened, the frequency of the second start winning opening formed by the normally variable winning ball apparatus 6B is expanded and opened, and the game ball becomes the second starting winning opening. It becomes easy to pass (enter). Further, in the general map display result determination process, when the general map display result is “per normal map”, the tilt control time that is the time for the second start winning opening to be in the expanded open state or the number of times to be in the expanded open state A certain number of tilt control times may be set. At this time, when the time reduction flag is on, the tilt control time and the number of times of tilt control are set to be larger than when the time reduction flag is off. As a result, in a special game state such as during a high base where time-shortening control or high-opening control is performed in the probability variation state or short-time state, the time and number of times that the second start winning opening is in the open state is increased, so that the game ball It becomes easier to pass (enter) the second start winning opening. Note that the setting for setting the second start winning opening in the expanded open state may be performed in the normal symbol stop process in step S142 or the normal electric accessory actuating process in step S143.

  The normal symbol variation process in step S141 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “1”. In this normal symbol variation process, the normal symbol display 20 is set to vary the normal symbol, and the elapsed time after the normal symbol starts to be varied is measured. Further, it is determined whether or not the elapsed time thus measured has reached a predetermined normal time fluctuation time.

  The normal symbol stop process in step S142 is executed when the value of the normal symbol process flag is “2”. In this normal symbol stop process, the normal symbol display 20 stops the change of the normal symbol based on the elapse of the normal symbol change time, and the fixed normal symbol that is the variable display result of the normal symbol is stopped and displayed (derived display). ) To make settings. The ordinary electric accessory actuating process of step S143 is executed when the value of the normal process flag is “3”. In this ordinary electric accessory actuating process, the movable wing piece included in the ordinary variable winning ball apparatus 6B is vertically aligned with the fact that the variable display result (the general map display result) in the normal game is “per normal map”. The setting for changing the second start winning opening from the normal open state to the enlarged open state by moving from the position to the tilt position is performed.

  Next, the operation in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated to execute the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 42 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the effect control board 12 to the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit).

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S72). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S72; No), the process of step S72 is repeatedly executed and waits.

  On the side of the production control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the production control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interruption that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, a control signal that becomes an effect control command from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. Capture. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the effect control buffer setting unit 194, for example. As an example, when the production control command has a 2-byte configuration, the first byte (MODE) and the second byte (EXT) are sequentially received and stored in the production control command reception buffer. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S72 (step S72; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S73), and command analysis processing is executed (step S74). In the command analysis process executed in step S74, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the reading is performed. Settings and control corresponding to the issued effect control command are performed.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S74, an effect control process is executed (step S75). In the effect control process of step S75, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decoration LED, and the effect The control content of the rendering operation using various rendering devices, such as the driving operation in the model, is determined, determined, and set according to the rendering control command transmitted from the main board 11.

  Following the effect control process in step S75, an effect random number update process is executed (step S76), and random numbers counted by the random counter of the effect control counter setting unit 193 are used as various random values used for effect control. The numerical data shown is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S72.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart illustrating an example of processing executed in step S75 of FIG. 42 as the effect control process. In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the following processes in steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the effect control flag setting unit 191. To do.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0”. This variable display start waiting process determines whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not the first variation start command or the second variation start command is received from the main board 11. The process etc. which determine are included.

  The variable display effect setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. This variable display effect setting processing corresponds to the decoration on the image display device 5 in response to the start of variable display of special symbols in the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. In order to perform variable display of symbols and other various effects, it includes a process of determining a fixed decorative symbol and various effect control patterns according to the variation pattern of special symbols and the type of display result.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 reads various control data from the effect control pattern corresponding to the timer value in the effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192, and displays the decorative pattern. Processing for performing various effects control during variable display is included. After performing such effect control, for example, when an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the symbol variation control pattern, or when a decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 is received. Correspondingly, the finalized decorative symbol as the final stop symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol is displayed in a completely stopped manner. When the final decorative design is displayed in response to the end code being read from the design variation control pattern, the variable display time corresponding to the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command has elapsed. In addition, even if the production control command from the main board 11 is not used, it is possible to determine and display the variable display result by autonomously deriving and displaying the determined decorative pattern on the production control board 12 side. When the finalized decorative symbol is displayed as a complete stop, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received. When the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is “6” corresponding to the big hit middle production process. Update to On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received and the hit start designation command designates the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit medium production process. To “4”. When the production control process timer times out without receiving a hit start designation command, it is determined that the special figure display result in the special figure game is “lost”, and the value of the production process flag is the initial value. Update to “0”.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In the small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the small hit gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the small hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the decoration LED is executed. In the small hit effect processing, for example, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “5”, which is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, for example. .

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit gaming state, etc., and displays an effect image based on the set contents in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 is output by outputting a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14. And various effect controls at the end of the small hit gaming state, such as turning on / off / flashing the decorative LED. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In this jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect content in the jackpot gaming state, and displays an effect image based on the set content in the display area of the image display device 5. In addition, a sound or sound effect is output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and a game effect lamp 9 or a decoration is output by outputting a command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14. Various effect control in the big hit gaming state such as lighting / extinguishing / flashing the LED for the game is executed. Further, in the big hit effect process, for example, in response to receiving a hit end designation command from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to “7” which is a value corresponding to the ending effect process.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets an effect control pattern or the like corresponding to the end of the big hit gaming state, for example, and displays an effect image based on the set content in the display area of the image display device 5. The sound and sound effects are output from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and the game effect lamp 9 and decoration are output by outputting the command (electric signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effect controls such as turning on / off / flashing the LED are executed at the end of the big hit gaming state. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect setting process executed in step S171 of FIG. In the variable display effect setting process shown in FIG. 44, the effect control CPU 120 first reads the EXT data in the variable display result notification command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, and the special figure display result is “lost”. It is determined whether or not (step S501). At this time, if it is determined that the special figure display result is “lost” (step S501; Yes), it is designated by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11, for example. It is determined whether or not the variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern corresponding to the case where the decorative symbol variable display mode is “non-reach” (step S502).

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; Yes), a combination of fixed decorative symbols that is the final stop symbol constituting the non-reach combination is determined (step S503). As an example, in the process of step S503, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to a predetermined left determined symbol determination table, the left determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the determined decorative symbols. Next, a predetermined right determined symbol determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random values for determining the right determined symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. , Etc., the right determined decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. At this time, the symbol number of the right determined decorative symbol may be determined so as to be different from the symbol number of the left determined decorative symbol by setting in the right determined symbol determining table or the like. Subsequently, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. , Etc., the middle fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined among the fixed decorative symbols.

  If it is determined in step S502 that the pattern is not a non-reach variation pattern (step S502; No), a combination of confirmed decorative symbols that is a final stop symbol constituting the reach combination is determined (step S504). As an example, in the process of step S504, first, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the left and right determined symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted and stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. In addition, by referring to a predetermined left / right determined symbol determination table or the like, the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 among the determined decorative symbols are stopped and displayed together. The decorative symbol with the same symbol number is determined. Further, numerical data indicating a random number for determining a medium fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined medium fixed symbol determination table stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted. By referring to this, among the determined decorative symbols, the medium fixed decorative symbol that is stopped and displayed in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C in the display area of the image display device 5 is determined. Here, for example, when the confirmed decorative symbol is a jackpot combination, such as when the symbol number of the middle confirmed decorative symbol is the same as the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol, an arbitrary value (For example, “1”) may be added to or subtracted from the symbol number of the medium-decorated decorative symbol so that the finalized decorative symbol is not the jackpot combination but the reach combination. Alternatively, when determining the medium-decorated decorative symbol, a difference (design difference) between the symbol number of the left confirmed decorative symbol and the right confirmed decorative symbol may be determined, and the medium-decorated decorative symbol corresponding to the symbol difference may be set. .

  When it is determined in step S501 that the special figure display result is not “lost” (step S501; No), the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “surprise”, or the special figure display It is determined whether the result is “small hit” or other cases (step S505). At this time, if it is determined that the big hit type is “surprise” or the special figure display result is “small hit” (step S505; Yes), the big hit type such as one of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 is “ The combination of the finalized decorative symbol that is the variable display result of the decorative symbol corresponding to the case of “accuracy” or the special symbol display result of “small hit” is determined (step S506). As an example, corresponding to the case where any one of the variation patterns PC1-1 to PC1-3 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the final stop symbols constituting any of the second opening chances TC1 to TC4 and The combination of the determined decorative design is determined. In this case, a predetermined chance index determination table preliminarily stored in the ROM 121 or the like is extracted by extracting numerical data indicating random numbers for chance index determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. It is sufficient to determine a combination of definite decorative symbols constituting any one of the two chances of opening TC1 to TC4 by referring to. Further, when either the variation pattern PC1-4 or the variation pattern PC1-5 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, by executing the same process as in step S504, the final stop symbols constituting the reach combination are performed. What is necessary is just to determine the combination of the definite design which becomes.

  When it is determined in step S505 that the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probability change” or “probability change” other than “probability” (step S505; No), the final stop constituting the big hit combination A combination of the confirmed decorative symbols to be symbols is determined (step S507). As an example, in the process of step S507, first, numerical data indicating a random number value for determining a jackpot fixed symbol updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and subsequently stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. Stop by aligning with the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the display area of the image display device 5 by referring to the stored predetermined jackpot determined symbol determination table. A decorative symbol having the same symbol number is determined. For example, when the jackpot type is “non-probable variation”, one of the non-probability variation symbols (for example, decorative symbols indicating the numbers “2”, “4”, “6”, “8”) is selected and non-probable This is the final stop symbol that constitutes the probable big hit combination. When the jackpot type is “probability change”, for example, the numbers of non-probability change symbols and probability change symbols (for example, “1”, “3”, “5”, “7”) are shown depending on the presence / absence of the probability change promotion effect. Any one of the decorative patterns) may be selected. More specifically, when a probable promotion effect such as a promotion effect during a change or a promotion effect during a jackpot is executed, one of the non-probable symbols is selected as in the case where the jackpot type is “non-probable change”. The final stop symbol constituting the non-probable variation big hit combination. On the other hand, when the probability variation promotion effect is not executed, one is selected from the probability variation symbols and becomes the final stop symbol constituting the probability variation jackpot combination. Alternatively, when the jackpot type is “probability variation”, either the non-probability variation symbol or the probability variation symbol is selected at a predetermined ratio, and it is determined whether or not to execute the probability variation promotion effect corresponding to the selection result. May be. In this case, when the non-probable variation symbol is selected, it is determined to execute the probability variation promotion effect, while when the probability variation symbol is selected, it may be determined not to execute the probability variation promotion effect.

  After executing any of the processes of steps S503, S504, S506, and S507, settings for executing a variable display effect such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” are performed (step S508). For example, in the process of step S508, variable display effects such as “pseudo-continuous” and “slip” are executed according to the variation pattern specified by reading the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command transmitted from the main board 11. It is determined whether or not. At this time, if it is determined that the variable display effect of “pseudo train” or “slip” is executed, the pseudo display is temporarily stopped in the variable display effect of “pseudo train” and any one of the pseudo-continuous chance items GC1 to GC8 is displayed. And the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the variable display effect of “slip” are determined.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S508, setting for executing the changing promotion effect is performed (step S509). For example, in the process of step S509, when the special figure display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable change” or “probable change”, whether or not the promotion effect during change is executed, and the change in execution What is necessary is just to determine the change promotion effect pattern etc. during a change corresponding to the production mode of the middle promotion effect. At this time, numerical data indicating a random value for determining a promotion promotion during change updated by a random counter or the like provided in the presentation control counter setting unit 193 is extracted, and a predetermined promotion promotion during change stored in advance in the ROM 121 or the like. By referring to the determination table, it may be determined whether or not the changing promotion effect is to be executed, the changing promotion effect pattern in the case of execution, and the like. Alternatively, it may be determined whether to execute the changing promotion effect in accordance with the changing pattern specified by the changing pattern specifying command. In this case, the presence / absence of the promotion effect during change is determined by determining the change pattern on the main board 11 side. Further, in response to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, whether or not to execute the changing promotion effect, the changing promotion effect pattern in the case of execution may be determined. In this case, both the presence / absence of the promotion effect during change and the type are determined by determining the change pattern on the main board 11 side. Separately from the variation pattern, the presence / absence of the changing promotion effect may be determined on the main board 11 side, or both the presence / absence and type of the changing promotion effect may be determined on the main board 11 side. Good.

  After executing the process of step S509, a notice effect setting process is executed (step S510). FIG. 45 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notice effect setting process executed in step S510. In the notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 45, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the notice effect by displaying the effect image, and as a use table for determining the display system notice type when it is executed. The display system notice type determination table 140A is selected and set (step S701). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR1-1 for display type notice type determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S702). Then, by referring to the display system notice type determination table 140A based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR1-1 extracted in step S702, there is no display system notice at a different rate according to the variation pattern, or the character One of the display system notice types of display CAY1 and step-up display CAY2 is determined (step S703). At this time, it is determined whether or not it has been determined in step S703 without a display system notice (step S704).

  When one of the display system notice types of the character display CAY1 and the step-up display CAY2 is determined (step S704; No), the display system notice pattern determination table 141A is associated with the determined display system notice type. Then, any one of the display system notice pattern determination table 141B is selected and set as a use table (step S705). That is, when the display system notice type for character display CAY1 is determined in step S703, the display system notice pattern determination table 141A is set. A system notice pattern determination table 141B is set. After that, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2-1 for display system announcement pattern determination updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S706). Subsequently, by referring to the display system notice pattern determination table set in step S705 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2-1 extracted in step S706, the display system is displayed at a different rate according to the variation pattern. A notice pattern is determined (step S707).

  When it is determined in step S704 that there is no display system notice (step S704; Yes), after executing the process of step S707, whether or not to execute a notice effect classified into the operation type notice type is executed. The process for determining the operation type advance notice type and the operation type advance notice pattern is executed. In the case of executing a notice effect classified into the display-type notice type, the notice effect classified into the operation-type notice type may be restricted so as not to be executed. In this case, after performing the process of step S707, the notice effect setting process may be terminated. In this way, only one of the notice effects produced by the display-type notice type and the notice effect classified as the operation-type notice type is executed, and the notice classified as the other notice type. By restricting the performance so as not to be executed, it is possible to prevent the competition of the notice effect, enhance the effect of the notice effect, and improve the game entertainment.

  In the process of determining the notice effect classified as the operation type notice type, first, the operation type notice type is used as a use table for deciding whether or not to execute the notice effect and determining the operation type notice type when it is executed. The decision table 140B is selected and set (step S708). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR1-2 for determining an operation type notice type updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S709). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR1-2 extracted in step S709, the operation system is referenced at a different rate according to the variation pattern by referring to the operation system notice type determination table 140B set in step S708. There is no prior notice, or one of the operation system notice types of push button single-shot CBY1, push-button continuous hit CBY2, trigger button single-shot CBY3, and trigger button continuous hit CBY4 is determined (step S710).

  In the process of step S710, the number of the first special figure holding memory or the second special figure is used in accordance with whether the special symbol variably displayed for use in the special figure game is the first special figure or the second special figure. The number of special figure hold memory is specified. That is, based on the reception of the first variation start command transmitted from the main board 11, the first special figure holding memory number is specified corresponding to the case where the special figure game using the first special figure is executed. To do. On the other hand, in response to the case where the special figure game using the second special figure is executed based on the reception of the second variation start command transmitted from the main board 11, the second special figure holding memory is stored. Identify the number. Then, depending on whether the specified first special figure reserved memory number or second special figure reserved memory number is “0” to “3” or “4”, it is referred to in the operation type notice type determination table 140B. Different table data may be used. As a result, the operation system advance notice is made at a different rate depending on whether or not the number of the special figure hold memory as the first special figure hold memory number or the second special figure hold memory number has reached a predetermined number (for example, “4”). None or can be determined for each operation type notice type.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not it has been determined in step S710 without operating system advance notice (step S711). And when it determines with there being no operation type | system | group notice (step S711; Yes), a notice effect setting process is complete | finished. On the other hand, when it is determined as one of the operation type advance notice types (step S711; No), the operation type advance notice pattern determination table 142A and the operation type advance notice pattern are determined corresponding to the determined operation type advance notice type. Any one of the table 142B, the operation system notice pattern determination table 142C, and the operation system notice pattern determination table 142D is selected and set as a use table (step S712). That is, if the operation type notice type determination table 142A for the push button single-shot CBY1 is determined in step S710, the operation type notice pattern determination table 142A is set. When the system notice pattern determination table 142B is set and the operation type advance notice type of the trigger button single-shot CBY3 is determined, the operation system notice pattern determination table 142C is set, and the operation type notice type of the trigger button repeated CBY4 is determined. In this case, the operation system notice pattern determination table 142D is set.

  Subsequent to the processing in step S712, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR2-2 for determining the operation system notice pattern updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S713). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR2-2 extracted in step S713, the operation system advance notice is determined at a different rate according to the variation pattern by referring to the operation system advance pattern determination table set in step S712. After determining the pattern (step S714), the notice effect setting process is terminated.

  In the notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 45, the notice effect classified into the display-type notice type is first determined by the processes in steps S701 to S707, and then classified into the operation-type notice type by the processes in steps S708 to S714. The notice effect will be decided later. On the other hand, after the announcement effect classified into the operation type announcement type is determined first, the announcement effect classified into the display type announcement type may be decided later. In this case, when an operation system notice pattern for executing a notice effect classified into the operation system notice type is determined, the notice effect setting process is terminated and the notice effect classified into the display system notice type is not executed. You may do it. That is, the notice effect that is classified into the operation type notice type may be executed with priority over the notice effect that is classified into the display type notice type. Or, when the notice effect setting process is started, first, the notice effect classified into either the notice effect classified as the display-type notice type or the notice effect classified as the operation-type notice type is executed. It may be determined whether to do. And the process which determines the notification pattern etc. for performing the notification effect classified into the determined notification classification should just be performed.

  After executing the above notice effect setting process in step S510 shown in FIG. 44, the stop symbol notice effect setting process is executed (step S511). FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example of the stop symbol notice effect setting process executed in step S511. In the stop symbol notice effect setting process shown in FIG. 46, the effect control CPU 120 first selects the stop symbol notice effect execution determination table 145 as a use table for determining whether or not to execute the stop symbol notice effect. Is set (step S751). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR5 for determining stop symbol notice effect execution updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S752). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR5 extracted in step S752, referring to the stop symbol notice effect execution determination table 145, “execution is performed” or “execution” is performed at a different rate depending on the variation pattern. "None" is determined (step S753). At this time, it is determined whether or not “executed” is determined in step S753 (step S754). When it is determined that “no execution” is set (step S754; No), the stop symbol notice effect setting process is terminated.

  If it is determined that “execution is performed” (step S754; Yes), the stop symbol advance notice effect pattern determination table 146A or 146B is selected and set as the use table for determining the stop symbol advance effect pattern (step S755). ). In the process of step S755, when the variation pattern specified from the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command is a variation pattern not accompanied by a pseudo-continuous, the stop symbol advance notice effect pattern determination table 146A is selected and accompanied by a pseudo-continuous. If the pattern is a variation pattern, the stop symbol notice effect pattern determination table 146B is selected. Also, the variation pattern specified from the EXT data in the variation pattern designation command differs depending on whether it corresponds to “non-reach lose”, “reach lose”, “big hit”, “surprise” or “small hit” A determination value (a row in the stop symbol advance notice effect pattern determination tables 146A and 146B shown in FIG. 25) for determining the stop symbol advance effect pattern is selected. Furthermore, in the case of the “non-reach lose” variation pattern not accompanied by a pseudo-ream, in step S503 of FIG. Depending on whether or not a combination of decorative symbols indicating the same number is determined, a determination value (1 in the stop symbol notification effect pattern determination table 146A shown in FIG. 25A) for determining a different stop symbol notification effect pattern is determined. The second or second line) is selected. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random value SR6 for determining a stop symbol notice effect pattern that is updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S756). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR6 extracted in step S756, by referring to the stop symbol announcement effect pattern determination table 146A or 146B, the stop symbol announcement effect pattern is changed at a different rate depending on the variation pattern. Is determined (step S757).

  Subsequent to step S757, the notice symbol number determination table 148 is selected and set as a use table for determining the number of notice symbols to be displayed in the stop symbol notice effect (step S758). Next, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR8 for determining the number of notice symbols updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S759). Then, by referring to the notice symbol number determination table 148 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR8 extracted in step S759, “right only” or “left / right” at a different rate depending on the variation pattern. ] (Step S760).

  44. Next, the notice symbol to be displayed in the stop symbol notice effect is determined according to the final stop symbol determined in steps S503, S504, S506, and S507 in FIG. 44 or the pseudo continuous chance determined in step S508 ( Step S761).

  In step S761, if the stop symbol notice effect pattern determined in step S757 is TPZ1-1, TPZ2-1, TPZ4-1, it corresponds to the final stop symbol determined in steps S503, S504, S506, S507. The notice symbol is decided. If the stop symbol notice effect pattern determined in step S757 is TPZ1-2, TPZ2-2, TPZ4-2, steps S503, S504, and S506 are provided as notice symbols to be displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. , The notice symbol corresponding to the final stop symbol determined in S507 is determined, and the final stop symbol determined in steps S503, S504, S506, and S507 as the notice symbol to be displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5L. A notice symbol showing a different number is determined. In this case, the notice symbol indicating a number different from the final stop symbol may be determined by lottery or determined based on the final stop symbol (for example, one shift from the number indicated by the final stop symbol). The notice symbol indicating the number is determined). If the stop symbol notice effect pattern determined in step S757 is TPZ1-3, the notice symbol corresponding to the final stop symbol determined in step S503 is used as the notice symbol to be displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. As a notice symbol to be displayed and displayed in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5L, a notice symbol corresponding to the ornament symbol to be stopped in the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C among the final stop symbols determined in step S503. Is determined.

  If the stop symbol notice effect pattern determined in step S757 is TPZ3-1, the notice symbol corresponding to the pseudo consecutive chance determined in step S508 is determined. If the stop symbol notice effect pattern determined in step S757 is TPZ3-2, the notice symbol corresponding to the pseudo consecutive chance determined in step S508 is displayed as the notice symbol to be displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. Is determined, and a notice symbol indicating a number (a number that does not become reach) different from the pseudo consecutive chance determined in step S508 is determined as the notice symbol to be displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5L. In this case, a notice symbol indicating a number different from the pseudo-continuous chance may be determined by a lottery or determined based on the pseudo-continuous chance (for example, from the number indicated by the pseudo-continuous chance) A notice symbol indicating a number shifted by one may be determined). If the stop symbol notice effect pattern determined in step S757 is TZP3-3, the notice symbol corresponding to the pseudo consecutive chance determined in step S508 as the notice symbol to be displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. As the notice symbol to be displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5L, the same notice symbol (the number to reach) as the notice symbol to be displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L is determined.

  In addition, in the stop symbol notice effect pattern (TZP1-2, TZP1-3, TZP2-2, TZP3-2, TZP3-3, TZP4-2) for executing the button operation promotion effect, the notice symbol after change is also determined. . The notice symbol after the change may be determined corresponding to the final stop symbol or the pseudo-continuous chance.

  Subsequently, in step S757, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol notice effect pattern (TZP1-2, TZP1-3, TZP2-2, TZP3-3, TZP3-3, TZP4-2) for executing the button operation promotion effect is determined. Is determined (step S762). When it is determined that the stop symbol notice effect pattern does not execute the button operation promotion effect (step S762; No), the stop symbol notice effect setting process ends.

  If the stop symbol advance effect pattern for executing the button operation promotion effect is determined (step S762; Yes), the number of operations required to change the notice symbol displayed in the stop symbol advance effect is determined. As the use table, the required operation count determination table 147 is selected and set (step S763). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random number SR7 for determining the required operation count updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S764). Then, by referring to the required operation count determination table 147 based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR7 extracted in step S764, “10 times” or “15 times” at different rates depending on the variation pattern. (Step S765). Thereafter, the stop symbol notice effect setting process is terminated.

  After executing the stop symbol notice effect setting process as described above in step S511 shown in FIG. 44, the effect control pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns prepared in advance (step S512). At this time, the production control CPU 120 selects one of a plurality of prepared symbol variation control patterns corresponding to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, for example, and sets it as a usage pattern. For example, it corresponds to the display system notice pattern determined in step S707 shown in FIG. 45, the operation system notice pattern determined in step S714, and the stop symbol notice effect pattern determined in step S757 shown in FIG. Then, one of a plurality of prepared notice effect control patterns is selected and set as a use pattern.

  Following the processing in step S512, for example, an initial value of an effect control process timer provided in the effect control timer setting unit 192 is set corresponding to the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command (step S513). And the setting for starting the fluctuation | variation of the decoration design etc. in the image display apparatus 5 is performed (step S514). At this time, for example, the display control command designated by the display control data included in the symbol variation control pattern determined as the use pattern in step S512 is transmitted to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123. The variation of the decorative symbols may be started in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the five display areas. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “2”, which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (step S515), and the effect setting processing during variable display ends.

  FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing an example of the variable display effect process executed in step S172 of FIG. In the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 47, the effect control CPU 120 updates (for example, subtracts 1) the effect control process timer value (step S531), and uses the updated effect control process timer value as the effect control pattern. Is compared with the production control process timer determination value shown in FIG. 6 to determine whether or not any of the timer determination values is met (step S532).

  If the timer determination value matches with the timer determination value in step S532 (step S532; Yes), the effect control execution data (for example, display control data, voice control data, and the like) stored in the effect control pattern in association with the timer determination value. The lamp control data, a part or all of the operation detection control data) or the end code is read (step S533). Here, when the plurality of timer determination values indicated by the effect control pattern match the effect control process timer value in step S532, the plurality of effect controls stored in association with the matched timer determination values. The execution data may be read in step S533. Then, in step S533, it is determined whether or not the end code has been read (step S534). At this time, when it is determined that it is not the end code (step S534; No), an effect control command process for performing an instruction or setting according to the effect control execution data read in step S533 is executed. (Step S535), the variable display effect process is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S534 that it is an end code (step S534; Yes), for example, by setting a predetermined timer initial value in the effect control process timer, the hit start designation command reception waiting time is set. This is performed (step S536). Then, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3” which is a value corresponding to the waiting process per special figure (step S537), and the effect process during variable display is ended. As a result, when the next timer interrupt occurs, wait processing per special figure is executed, and if the hit start designation command is not received before the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses, the rendering process flag is cleared, The value is initialized to “0”. On the other hand, if a hit start designation command is received before the hit start designation command reception waiting time elapses, effect control is performed depending on whether the special figure display result is “small hit” or “big hit”. By updating the value of the process flag to “4” or “6”, it is only necessary to control the rendering operation at the time of a small hit or a big hit.

  Moreover, also when it does not correspond with any of the timer determination values in step S532 (step S532; No), the variable display effect processing is ended. However, if it is determined that the decorative symbol stop command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received after executing the process of step S532 or before executing the process of step S532, the process of step S536 is performed. In advance, the waiting process per special figure may be executed when the next timer interrupt occurs.

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing an example of the effect control command process executed in step S535 of FIG. In the effect control command process, the effect control CPU 120 first specifies the type of effect control execution data read in the process of step S533 shown in FIG. 47 (step S721). At this time, it is only necessary to specify which control data is included among the display control data, audio control data, lamp control data, and operation detection control data included in the presentation control execution data.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is display control data (step S722). At this time, if it is determined that the data is display control data (step S722; Yes), a setting for sending a display control command designated by the display control data to the VDP or the like of the display control unit 123 is performed. (Step S723).

  When it is determined in step S722 that the display control data is not (step S722; No), after executing the process of step S723, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is audio control data. (Step S724). At this time, when it is determined that it is voice control data (step S724; Yes), a sound effect signal corresponding to the sound number data designated by the voice control data is sent to the voice control board 13. Setting is performed (step S725).

  When it is determined in step S724 that the data is not voice control data (step S724; No), after the process of step S725 is executed, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is lamp control data. (Step S726). At this time, if it is determined that the data is lamp control data (step S726; Yes), a setting is made to send an illumination signal designated by the lamp control data to the lamp control board 14 (step S727). ).

  When it is determined in step S726 that the data is not lamp control data (step S726; No), after executing the process of step S727, it is determined whether or not the specified effect control execution data is operation detection control data. Determination is made (step S728). At this time, when it is determined that it is not the operation detection control data (step S728; No), the effect control command process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation detection control data is determined (step S728; Yes), based on the operation detection control data, a predetermined instruction operation (for example, a pressing operation or the like) for the player's push button 31B is performed. ) Is effectively detected, and it is determined whether or not it is a push button validity detection period, which is a period during which the effect operation can be switched according to the detection result (step S729). For example, in the notice effect that is classified as single push button CBY1 or push button repeated hit CBY2, push until a predetermined time elapses after the effect image prompting the operation of the push button 31B is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. What is necessary is just to prescribe | regulate by the operation detection control data matched with the predetermined | prescribed effect control process timer determination value so that it may become a button effective detection period.

  When it is determined in step S729 that it is the push button validity detection period (step S729; Yes), the player's instruction operation for the trigger button 31A provided in the stick controller 30 is limited so as not to be detected. Detection limit setting is performed (step S730). For example, in the process of step S730, it is only necessary to limit the instruction operation to the trigger button 31A so as not to be detected by stopping the operation of the trigger sensor 35A that detects the instruction operation to the trigger button 31A. Or you may restrict | limit detection of instruction | indication operation by controlling not to check the operation detection signal transmitted from 35 A of trigger sensors. Further, when the instruction operation for the trigger button 31A is restricted so as not to be detected, the tilt operation for the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 may be restricted so as not to be detected.

  Subsequent to the process of step S730, after performing the effect control based on the detection result of the instruction operation on the push button 31B (step S731), the effect control command process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S731, based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the push sensor 35B to the effect control board 12, it is determined whether or not a predetermined instruction operation (for example, a pressing operation) for the push button 31B has been detected. To do. And when instruction operation with respect to the push button 31B is detected, the setting for changing the production content etc. may be made according to the detection result. Even in the push button valid detection period, when the player's instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected, settings for changing the content of the production or the like may be performed according to the detection result. Good. In this case, when an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected, the effect content may be changed in the same manner as when an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected, or when an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected. The contents of the presentation may be changed in a different manner.

  When it is determined in step S729 that it is not the push button effective detection period (step S729; No), based on the operation detection control data, the player tilts the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the trigger button 31A. A predetermined instruction operation (for example, a push-pull operation) is effectively detected, and it is determined whether or not it is a stick controller effective detection period that is a period in which the rendering operation can be switched according to the detection result (step S732). . For example, in a notice effect that is classified as single trigger button CBY3 or trigger button repeated CBY4, an effect image that prompts the user to operate the operation stick 30A of the stick controller 30 or the trigger button 31A is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5. What is necessary is just to prescribe | regulate beforehand by the operation detection control data matched with the predetermined | prescribed effect control process timer determination value so that it may be set as the stick controller effective detection period until predetermined time passes.

  If it is determined in step S732 that it is the stick controller valid detection period (step S732; Yes), detection limit setting is performed to limit the player's instruction operation to the push button 31B so as not to be detected (step S732). S733). For example, in the process of step S733, it is only necessary to limit the instruction operation to the push button 31B from being detected by stopping the operation of the push sensor 35B that detects the instruction operation to the push button 31B. Or you may restrict | limit detection of instruction | indication operation by restrict | limiting not to check the operation detection signal transmitted from push sensor 35B.

  Subsequent to the process of step S733, the effect control based on the detection result of the instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is executed (step S734), and the effect control command process is terminated. For example, in the process of step S734, whether or not a predetermined instruction operation (for example, a push-pull operation) for the trigger button 31A is detected based on an operation detection signal transmitted from the trigger sensor 35A to the effect control board 12 is determined. judge. Further, based on the operation detection signal transmitted from the tilt direction sensor unit 32 to the effect control board 12, it is determined whether or not the tilt operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operation rod 30A is detected. Then, when a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A or an instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A is detected, a setting for changing the contents of the production may be performed according to the detection result. Even in the trigger button valid detection period, when a player's instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected, a setting for changing the content of the effect or the like may be performed according to the detection result. Good. In this case, when an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected, the effect content may be changed in the same manner as when an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected, or when an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected. The contents of the presentation may be changed in a different manner.

  If it is determined in step S732 that it is not the stick controller valid detection period (step S732; No), other operation detection control based on the operation detection control data is performed (step S735), and the effect control command processing is performed. finish. For example, in the process of step S735, based on the operation detection control data, the push button effective detection period and the stick controller effective detection period are terminated, and a setting for limiting the instruction operation or the like by the player from being detected thereafter is set. Can be done.

  As an example of the process executed in step S731 of such an effect control command process, when a “push button repeated hit” notice effect classified as an operation type notice type of push button repeated hit CBY2 is executed, FIG. It suffices if the push button continuous hitting process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. In the push button continuous hitting process shown in FIG. 49, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not it is a predetermined effect start time based on the operation detection control data and the like (step S801). For example, in the process of step S801, when a push button validity detection period for effectively detecting an instruction operation to the push button 31B is started by a notice effect by an operation type notice pattern classified as an operation notice type of the push button continuous hit CBY2. In addition, it may be determined that it is time to start production.

  If it is determined in step S801 that the production is to start (step S801; Yes), for example, an operation detection counter initial value (by clearing an operation detection counter provided in the production control counter setting unit 193). For example, “0” or the like is set (step S802). Subsequently, an effect change determination value corresponding to the operation system notice pattern or the like is set (step S803). The effect change determination value set in step S803 indicates the number of detections of the instruction operation for the push button 31B required from the start of the predetermined effect until the first change of the effect content, and is set as a usage pattern, for example. Any numerical value may be used depending on the operation system notice pattern or the like. For example, in the case of an operation system warning pattern having a high possibility that the variable display result will be a “big hit” (hit reliability), compared to the operation system warning pattern having a low jackpot reliability (eg, “10”). By setting a small numerical value (for example, “5”) as the effect change determination value, it is only necessary that the effect content is easily changed according to the continuous hitting operation on the push button 31B.

  When it is determined in step S801 that it is not at the start of the production (step S801; No), after executing the process of step S803, it is determined whether or not there has been a button-on detection by an instruction operation on the push button 31B ( Step S804). At this time, if it is determined that no button-on has been detected (step S804; No), it is only necessary to limit the content of the effect so as not to be changed by terminating the push button continuous hitting process. On the other hand, when it is determined that button-on is detected (step S804; Yes), the operation detection count value is updated, for example, by adding 1 (step S805). Then, it is determined whether or not the updated operation detection count value has reached the effect change determination value (step S806).

  If the operation detection count value does not reach the effect change determination value in step S806 (step S806; No), the push button continuous hitting process is terminated. On the other hand, when the operation detection count value reaches the effect change determination value (step S806; Yes), the setting for changing the effect content is performed (step S807). For example, in the process of step S807, the content of the effect is changed according to the repeated operation on the push button 31B by switching the process data included in the effect control pattern based on the operation detection control data. That's fine. Here, the type of process data after switching, the decision ratio of switching to a plurality of types of process data, and the like, the operating system advance notice pattern set as the usage pattern, the progress of the contents of the effect in the advance notice effect, step S806 The operation detection count value may be varied depending on part or all of the timing at which it is determined that the operation change count value has reached the effect change determination value.

  Subsequent to the process of step S807, a new effect change determination value is set according to the changed contents of the effect or the like (step S808), and then the process at the time of repeated push button is ended. In the process of step S808, a different numerical value may be set as the effect change determination value according to the progress of the effect operation (the degree to which the effect content has changed). For example, when the directing operation is proceeding to the vicinity of the final stage of the predetermined effect content because the instruction operation for the push button 31B is detected many times within a short time after the predetermined effect is started. By setting a larger value (for example, “20”) than the normal case (for example, “10”) as the effect change determination value, the content of the effect may be made difficult to change. Also in the process of step S808, similar to the process of step S803, the setting of the effect change determination value may be made different according to the operation system notice pattern set as the usage pattern. For example, in the case of an operation-type notice pattern informing that the degree of reliability is high, an effect change determination value so that a final achievement effect in the notice effect (for example, a scene where the opponent is pulled down by a tug of war) can be executed. Is set to a numerical value (for example, “10”, etc.) that can be actually generated. On the other hand, in the case of the operation system notice pattern informing that the reliability is low, when the notice effect has progressed to a predetermined stage, the effect change determination value is set so that the final achievement effect is not executed. It may be set to a numerical value that cannot actually be generated (for example, “9999”). Alternatively, in the case of an operation-type notice pattern that informs that the reliability is low, when the notice effect has progressed to a predetermined stage, all button-on detections by the process of step S804 are invalidated (step S804; No). After that, the content of the production may not be changed. In the process of step S808, the setting of the effect change determination value may be made different depending on whether the variable display result is “lost” or “big hit” instead of the operation system notice pattern. For example, when the variable display result is “big hit”, the effect change determination value at which the final achievement effect can be executed is the same as in the case of the operation system notice pattern informing that the reliability is high as described above. Is set. On the other hand, when the variable display result is “lost”, as in the case of the operation-related notice pattern informing that the reliability is low as described above, the final achievement effect is not executed. It is only necessary to set a change determination value.

  49, when the operation detection count value reaches the effect change determination value, the setting for changing the effect content is always performed. On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to change the effect content may be made at a different rate depending on the operation detection count value. For example, depending on the operation detection count value, an effect content change determination table is prepared in which assignment of the determined value to the determination result of whether to change the effect content is different. Then, after the operation detection count value is updated in step S805 shown in FIG. 49, for example, numerical data indicating a random value for determining the effect content change updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193. To extract. Subsequently, based on the extracted random number value for determining the content of the effect, by referring to the effect content change determination table, it is determined whether to change the content of the effect at a different rate depending on the operation detection count value. What should I do?

  In addition, by referring to the production content change determination table in which the determination value assignment to the determination result of whether or not to change the production content depends on the progress status of the production content, the operation detection count value and the progress status of the production content are referred to. Whether or not to change the effect content may be determined at a different rate according to the above. Instead of deciding whether or not to change the content of the production, or together with deciding whether or not to change the content of the production, the production after the change at a different rate depending on the progress of the production content and the operation detection count value The content may be determined. Alternatively, in the push button continuous hitting process, each time an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected, whether or not the content of the effect is changed at a different rate depending on the progress of the effect content at the current time, and the effect after the change The content may be determined.

  As another example of the process executed in step S731 of the effect control command process shown in FIG. 48, when a “push button single shot” notice effect classified as an operation type notice type of the push button single shot CBY1 is executed, etc. In addition, the push button single shot processing different from the push button continuous hit processing may be executed. In the push button single-shot process, the effect control CPU 120 measures, for example, the elapsed time from the start of the push button validity detection period, and based on the elapsed time when the instruction operation to the push button 31B is detected, etc. It is only necessary to determine whether or not to change the content of the effect in the notice effect, and the content of the effect after the change. Also, whether or not to change the content of the announcement when the instruction operation to the push button 31B is detected at a different rate depending on the operation system announcement pattern set as the usage pattern, the content of the effect after the change, etc. May be determined. Alternatively, depending on whether the variable display result is “losing” or “big hit”, whether or not the contents of the effect in the notice effect are changed when an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected, The contents of the performance may be determined.

  In this way, the “push button single shot” notice effect that is classified into the push system single operation type of the push button CBY1 is executed, or “push button continuous hit” that is classified into the operation type notice type of the push button continuous hit CBY2. Depending on whether the notice effect is executed, different processing is executed in step S731. As a result, even when one instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected during the execution of the notice effect, the process for changing the effect contents in the notice effect of “single push button” and the “push button repeated hit” There is no confusion between the notice effect and the process for changing the contents of the effect.

  As an example of the process executed in step S734 of the effect control command process, when the trigger effect “single trigger button” classified as the operation type notification type of the trigger button single CBY3 is executed, etc. Time processing may be executed. In the trigger button single-shot process, the effect control CPU 120 performs display switching of effect images according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A based on, for example, an operation detection signal transmitted from the tilting direction sensor unit 32. It is only necessary to determine whether or not the effect image to be displayed after switching. Then, based on the display content of the effect image at the timing when the instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected, it is only necessary to determine whether the effect content in the notice effect is to be changed, the effect content after the change, or the like. In addition, when the tilting operation with respect to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 or the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A is detected at a different rate according to the operation system notification pattern set as the usage pattern, the content of the effect in the notification effect is changed. Whether or not to perform, and the contents of the effect after the change may be determined.

  As another example of the process executed in step S734 of the effect control command process, the trigger button is executed when the “trigger button repeated hit” notice effect classified as the operation type notice type of the trigger button repeated hit CBY4 is executed. A process at the time of repeated trigger button different from the process at the time of single shot may be executed. In the trigger button continuous hitting process, for example, the push button continuous hitting process shown in FIG. 49 is adapted to the trigger button 31A, and the effect image is switched and displayed in accordance with the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A. It suffices if processing is executed. That is, in the trigger button continuous hitting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not to switch the effect image according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A, as in the case of the trigger button single shot process. It is only necessary to be able to determine the effect image to be displayed after switching. Then, based on the display content of the effect image at the timing when the number of indication operations detected with respect to the trigger button 31A reaches the predetermined number, it is determined whether or not to change the effect content in the notice effect, and the effect content after the change. I can do it. In addition, when the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A is detected or the number of detections of the pointing operation with respect to the trigger button 31A reaches a predetermined number at different ratios depending on the operation system notice pattern set as the usage pattern. Sometimes, it may be determined whether or not to change the content of the effect in the notice effect, and the content of the effect after the change. Alternatively, it may be determined whether or not to change the content of the production at a different rate depending on the progress of the content of the production and the number of times the instruction operation is detected on the trigger button 31A. Alternatively, every time an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected, whether or not to change the content of the production at a different rate depending on the progress of the content of the current production, and the changed content of the production are determined. May be.

  In this way, a “trigger button single shot” notice effect that is classified into the operation type notice type of the trigger button single-shot CBY3 is executed, or “trigger button repeated shot” classified as the operation type notice type of the trigger button repeated shot CBY4. Different processing is executed in step S734 depending on whether the notice effect is executed. As a result, even when a single instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected during the execution of the notice effect, the process for changing the effect contents in the notice effect of “single trigger button” and “trigger button repeated hit” There is no confusion between the notice effect and the process for changing the contents of the effect.

  FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example of the special chart waiting process executed in step S173 of FIG. In the special chart waiting process shown in FIG. 50, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the hit start designation command reception waiting time set in step S536 in FIG. 43 has elapsed (step S551). If the hit waiting designation command reception waiting time has elapsed (step S551; Yes), the effect process flag is cleared and its value is initialized to “0” (step S552), and then waiting for a special figure. The process ends.

  If the hit start designation command reception waiting time has not elapsed in step S551 (step S551; No), it is determined whether or not a hit start designation command transmitted from the main board 11 has been received (step S553). ). At this time, if no hit start designation command is received (step S553; No), the waiting process for the special figure is terminated. On the other hand, when the hit start designation command is received (step S553; Yes), it is determined whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S554). If the special figure display result is not “big hit” (step S554; No), the special figure display result is “small hit”, so that the value of the production process flag corresponds to the small hit medium production process. After the value is updated to “4” (step S555), the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S554 that the special figure display result is “big hit” (step S554; Yes), it is determined whether or not the promotion effect during the big hit is executed (step S556). In the process of step S556, it may be determined whether or not the jackpot promotion effect is executed based on a confirmed decorative pattern that is a variable display result of the decorative pattern. For example, it may be determined that the jackpot promotion effect is always executed when a definite decorative big hit combination definite decorative symbol is derived and displayed as a variable symbol display result. Alternatively, when the big hit type is “probable change”, it is determined that the promotion effect during the big hit is always executed when the definite decorative combination of the non-probable big hit combination is derived and displayed as the variable display result of the decorative symbol, Is “non-probable change”, it may be determined whether or not the jackpot promotion effect is executed at a predetermined rate based on numerical data indicating a random value for determining the jackpot promotion effect execution. .

  When it is determined in step S556 that the jackpot promotion effect is executed (step S556; Yes), the probability change is used as a use table for determining the timing at which the jackpot promotion effect as the probability change promotion effect is executed. The promotion effect execution determination table 143 is selected and set (step S557). Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating the random number SR3 for determining the probable promotion promotion effect updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S558). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR3 extracted in step S558, by referring to the probability variation promotion effect execution time determination table 143 set in step S557, promotion is performed from a plurality of execution timings prepared in advance. The execution time is determined (step S559).

  After the process of step S559 is executed, any of the probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table (when promotion fails) 144A and the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (when promotion is successful) 144B is used as a use table for determining the probability change promotion effect pattern. Is selected and set (step S560). For example, if the jackpot type is “non-probable change” and the promotion failure effect is executed, the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (at the time of promotion failure) 144A is set, while the jackpot type is “probability change” and the promotion success effect is When executed, the probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table (at the time of successful promotion) 144B is set. Subsequently, for example, numerical data indicating a random value SR4 for determining a probable change promotion effect pattern updated by a random counter or the like provided in the effect control counter setting unit 193 is extracted (step S561). Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random value SR4 extracted in step S561, by referring to the probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table set in step S560, the probability variation promotion effect pattern at a different rate according to the promotion effect execution time. Is determined as one of a plurality of patterns (step S562).

  When it is determined in step S556 that there is no execution of the jackpot promotion effect (step S556; No), after executing the process of step S562, the value of the effect process flag is set to a value corresponding to the jackpot effect process. After updating to “6” (step S563), the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  Hereinafter, an example of specific control in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. In the effect control board 12, in response to receiving the first change start command and the second change start command transmitted from the main board 11, for example, the effect control is performed based on the change pattern specified by the change pattern specifying command. For example, the CPU 120 performs a variable display effect setting process shown in FIG. 44 to set various effect operations during variable display of decorative symbols.

  At this time, in the notice effect setting process executed in step S510, the operation type notice type is determined as one of a plurality of types by the processes in steps S708 to S710 shown in FIG. As a specific example of the operation system notice type, in this embodiment, for example, the push button single-shot CBY1, the push button repeated hit CBY2, and the trigger button that can be determined by referring to the operation system notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. Four types of single-shot CBY3 and trigger button continuous hit CBY4 are determined in advance. Of these, the “trigger button single-shot” notice effect classified as the trigger system single trigger button CBY3 and the “trigger button repeated hit” notice effect classified as the trigger button repeated action type CBY4 The contents of the effect are changed according to the tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A of the controller 30 and the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A. On the other hand, in the notice effect of “push button single shot” classified as the operation type advance notice type of push button single shot CBY1, and the notice effect of “push button repeat shot” classified as the operation type notice type of push button repeated hit CBY4, The content of the effect is changed according to the instruction operation on the push button 31B. Then, in the operation system advance notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, according to the variation pattern designated by the change pattern designation command, assignment of a decision value for no operation system advance notice or each operation system advance notice type is performed. The decision value assignments for are different.

  As an example, when the big hit variation pattern is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the ratio determined as the operation type notice type of the trigger button single CBY3 is higher than when the loss variation pattern is designated, The determined value is assigned so that the ratio determined to the operation type advance notice type of the push button single-shot CBY1 or the push button repeated hit CBY2 becomes low. With such a setting, the possibility that the special figure display result will be a “hit” (hit hit reliability) can be made different depending on which operation notice type included in the operation system notice type is executed. That is, when a “trigger button single shot” notice effect classified as the operation type notice type of the trigger button single CBY3 is executed, a “push button single shot” notice effect classified as the operation type notice type of the push button single CBY1 is executed. There is a possibility that the special figure display result will be a “big hit” compared to when the “push button repeated hit” notice effect is executed, which is classified into the operation type notice type of the push button repeated hit CBY2 ( Big hit reliability).

  Here, the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command is determined based on the special figure display result determined by the processing of step S240 shown in FIG. 37, and the variation pattern type is determined by the processing of steps S261 to S271 shown in FIG. Then, the determination is made by executing the processes of steps S272 and S273. Therefore, whether or not to execute a notice effect classified as an operation-type notice type, and which operation-type notice type to use when executing, determines whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit” Determined based on the results. Note that, regardless of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the operation type advance notice type may be determined based on the decision result whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”. . For example, in response to the special figure display result notified by the variable display result notification command, there is no operation type advance notice type, or by referring to a decision table in which a decision value is assigned to each operation type advance notice type, What is necessary is just to determine the operation type notice type.

  Also, in the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, a variation pattern for executing a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is designated by a variation pattern designation command, or a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is displayed. Depending on whether or not a change pattern to be executed is designated, assignment of a decision value for no operation system notice or assignment of a decision value for each operation system notice type is different. In addition, according to the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, the assignment of the decision value for no operation system notice or the assignment of the decision value for each operation system notice type is different.

  As an example, among the plurality of types of variation patterns shown in FIG. 7, the variation pattern PA4-1, variation pattern PA4-2, variation pattern PB4-1, and variation pattern PB4-2 all have special chart display results of “big hit”. Corresponding to the case, the variation pattern in which the definite decorative symbol of the jackpot combination is derived and displayed after the reach effect of the normal reach is executed. In the variation pattern PA4-1 and variation pattern PA4-2, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed, while in the variation pattern PB4-1 and variation pattern PB4-2, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed. Is done. In the variation pattern PB4-1, the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect is “1”, whereas in the variation pattern PB4-2, the pseudo continuous variation in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect. The number of executions of fluctuation is “twice”. In the setting example of the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, when the variation pattern PA4-1 or the variation pattern PA4-2 is designated by the variation pattern designation command, the variation pattern becomes “other than the above”. At the corresponding ratio, there is no operation system advance notice or each operation system advance notice type is determined. On the other hand, when the variation pattern PB4-1 or the variation pattern PB4-2 is designated, there is no operation system advance notice at a different rate from when the variation pattern PA4-1 or the variation pattern PA4-2 is designated. Alternatively, it is determined for each operation type notice type. In addition, when the variation pattern PB4-1 is designated and when the variation pattern PB4-2 is designated, there is no operation system advance notice or the ratio determined for each operation system advance notice type is different. The decision value is assigned. For example, when a variation pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed is designated, the trigger button single-shot CBY3 is compared to a case in which a variation pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is not executed is designated. The ratio determined for the operation type notice type may be increased. Further, as the number of executions of the pseudo continuous variation in the “pseudo continuous” variable display effect increases, the ratio determined as the operation type notice type of the trigger button single CBY3 may be increased.

  Note that, in the operation system notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, the operation system notice type is determined for each operation system notice type at a rate corresponding to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. I am doing so. The variation pattern in which the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed designates the total number of pseudo-continuous changes to be executed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect. Therefore, when determining the operation type advance notice type with reference to the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B, there is no operation type advance notice or each operation type advance notice at a different rate depending on the total number of pseudo continuous fluctuations. The type will be determined. On the other hand, depending on the number of pseudo-series fluctuations in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, there is no operation type advance notice type, or the ratio determined for each operation type advance notice type is varied. Also good. For example, regardless of the variation pattern specified by the variation pattern designation command, there is no operation type notice type corresponding to how many times the pseudo continuous variation executed in the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, or A decision table in which a decision value is assigned to each operation type notice type is prepared. Then, it is only necessary to determine the operation type notice type corresponding to each time of the pseudo continuous fluctuation (including the initial fluctuation).

  If the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is changing the latent probability by the processing of step S267 shown in FIG. In step S268, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A is selected. On the other hand, if the latent probability change is in progress, the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability change in progress) 133C is selected in step S270. Then, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A and the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C, assignment of determination values to each variation pattern type is different. Therefore, the determination ratio for each variation pattern also varies depending on whether the gaming state is the normal state or the latent probability is changing. In the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, the operation type advance notice type or each operation type advance notice type is determined at a rate corresponding to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. ing. Therefore, when determining the operation type advance notice type with reference to the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B, there is no operation type advance notice at a different rate depending on whether or not the gaming state is under latent probability change, or Each operation type notice type is determined.

  Note that, regardless of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the operation type advance notice type may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the gaming state is changing the latent probability. For example, the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is designated so as to specify whether or not the game state is in the latent probability change, and the operation is performed in accordance with the game state designated by the game state designation command. The operation type advance notice type may be determined by referring to a determination table in which a determination value is assigned to each operation type advance notice type or no operation type advance notice type. In this case, the process of step S267 shown in FIG. 38 is not executed, and when the gaming state is in the latent probability change, the variation pattern type determination is performed with reference to the same loss variation pattern type determination table as in the normal state. Even if it is made to be performed, it can be determined that there is no operation system advance notice or each operation system advance notice type at a different rate depending on whether or not the gaming state is changing the latent probability. As described above, each operation system advance notice type is determined by determining that there is no operation system advance notice or each operation system advance notice type at a ratio based on information other than the variation pattern designated from the main board 11 side. You may make it change the ratio performed. Alternatively, regardless of the information specified from the main board 11 side, whether or not the game state is changing the latent probability independently on the side of the production control board 12, whether the latent probability is changing or not. Depending on the ratio, there may be no operation system advance notice or each operation system advance notice type. For example, the production control CPU 120 has been controlled to the big hit gaming state (such as short and medium hits and other hits), and the progress of the game after the big hit gaming state has ended (variable display count, presence or absence of big hits, etc.) It is only necessary to store information for specifying the information in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 and manage whether or not the current gaming state is changing the latent probability. In addition, even if the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” or “big hit”, there will be no notification of the operation system at different rates depending on whether or not the game state is changing the latent probability, or each operation It may be determined as a system notice type.

  In the notice effect setting process in step S510 shown in FIG. 44, after the display system notice type is determined as one of a plurality of types by the processes in steps S701 to S703 shown in FIG. If it is determined (step S704; No), the display system notice pattern is determined as one of a plurality of patterns by the processing of steps S705 to S707. As a specific example of the display system advance notice type, in this embodiment, for example, there are two kinds of character display CAY1 and step-up display CAY2 that can be determined by referring to the display system advance notice type determination table 140A shown in FIG. , Predetermined. If the display type notice type of the step-up display CAY2 is determined in the process of step S703, the display-type notice pattern in the case where the “step-up display” notice effect is executed by the processes of steps S705 to S707. One of YAP2-1 to display system notice pattern YAP2-9 is determined. As shown in FIG. 28, in the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to display system notice pattern YAP2-9, the number of steps (number of steps) in which the notice mode changes in the notice effect of “step-up display” is different from each other. Yes.

  In the display system notice type determination table 140A shown in FIG. 16A, there is no display system notice or the ratio determined for each display system notice type differs according to the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command. As such, a decision value is assigned. Further, in the display system notice pattern determination table 141B shown in FIG. 18, each of the display system notice pattern YAP2-1 to the display system notice pattern YAP2-9 is decided according to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. Decision values are assigned so that the proportions are different. Also in the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, there is no operation type advance notice or the ratio determined for each operation type advance notice type differs according to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. As such, a decision value is assigned. Therefore, when determining the operation type advance notice type with reference to the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B, whether or not the “step up display” notice effect is executed, and the “step up display” notice effect. In FIG. 5, there is no operation system advance notice or each operation system advance notice type is determined at a different rate depending on the number of stages (number of steps) at which the notice mode changes.

  It should be noted that regardless of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, whether or not the “step-up display” notice effect is executed, and the number of stages in which the notice mode changes in the “step-up display” notice effect ( The operation type notice type may be determined at a different rate according to the number of steps). For example, there is no operation system advance notice type or each operation system corresponding to which of display system advance notice pattern YAP2-1 to display system advance notice pattern YAP2-9 is determined in the process of step S707 shown in FIG. The operation type notice type may be determined by referring to a decision table in which a decision value is assigned to the notice type.

  In the operation type notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, when the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number is “4”, these reserved memory numbers are “0”. More determination values than those in the case of “3” are assigned to the operation type notice type of the trigger button single-shot CBY3. Therefore, when the first special figure reserved memory number or the second special figure reserved memory number reaches “4”, the reserved memory number is higher than the case where these reserved memory numbers are “0” to “3”. A decision is made to execute the notice effect “single trigger button”. In addition, in the loss variation pattern type determination tables 133A to 133C shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, determination values are assigned to each variation pattern type in accordance with the number of special figure hold memories as the total hold memory number. Is different. In the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, the operation type advance notice type or each operation type advance notice type is determined at a rate corresponding to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. ing. Therefore, when determining the operation type advance notice type with reference to the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B, the special figure hold as the total reserved memory number, the first special figure reserved memory number, or the second special figure reserved memory number Depending on the number of memories, there is no operation system advance notice, or each operation system advance notice type is determined.

  It should be noted that, regardless of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the operation type notice type may be determined at a different rate depending on the number of special figure pending memories such as the total number of reserved memories. For example, there is no operation type advance notice type or a decision table in which a decision value is assigned to each operation type advance notice type corresponding to the total reserved memory number notified by the hold memory number notification command transmitted from the main board 11 The operation type notice type may be determined by referring to. Alternatively, from the difference between the number of receptions of the first start port winning designation command and the second start port winning designation command transmitted from the main board 11 and the number of receptions of the first variation start command and the second variation start command, the first characteristic is obtained. The figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number are specified, and there is no operation type notice type or each operation corresponding to the specified first special figure hold memory number and the second special figure hold memory number The operation type notice type may be determined by referring to the decision table in which the decision value is assigned to the type notice type.

  When the special figure display result is determined to be “losing”, it is determined whether or not the gaming state is in the high base by the processing in step S266 shown in FIG. 38, and if not in the high base, step S268 or S270 is performed. Through this process, the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A or the loss variation pattern type determination table (latency probability changing) 133C is selected. On the other hand, if it is during the high base, the loss variation pattern type determination table (in the high base) 133B is selected by the process of step S269. Then, in the loss variation pattern type determination table (normal time) 133A, the loss variation pattern type determination table (latent probability changing) 133C, and the loss variation pattern type determination table (high base) 133B, the determination value for each variation pattern type The assignment of is different. Therefore, the determination ratio for each variation pattern also varies depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state, a latent probability change, or a high base. In the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, the operation type advance notice type or each operation type advance notice type is determined at a rate corresponding to the change pattern designated by the change pattern designation command. ing. Therefore, when determining the operation type notice type with reference to the operation type notice type determination table 140B, there is no operation type notice at a different rate depending on whether or not the gaming state is in the high base, or Each operation type notice type is determined.

  Note that, regardless of the variation pattern designated by the variation pattern designation command, the operation type advance notice type may be determined at a different rate depending on whether or not the gaming state is in the high base. For example, the game state designation command transmitted from the main board 11 is designated so as to specify whether or not the game state is in a high base, and an operation corresponding to the game state designated by the game state designation command is performed. The operation type advance notice type may be determined by referring to a determination table in which a determination value is assigned to each operation type advance notice type or no operation type advance notice type. Alternatively, regardless of the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11, whether or not the game state is in the high base on the side of the effect control board 12 is managed independently. Depending on the ratio, there may be no operation system advance notice or each operation system advance notice type. For example, the effect control CPU 120 specifies information about how the big hit gaming state is controlled (such as the type of big hit) and the progress of the game after the big hit gaming state ends (variable display count, presence / absence of big hit, etc.). Is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122, and it is only necessary to manage whether or not the current gaming state is in the high base from these pieces of information. In addition, even if the special figure display result is determined to be “small hit” or “big hit”, there will be no notification of the operation system at different rates depending on whether the gaming state is in the high base or each operation It may be determined as a system notice type.

  After determining the operation type advance notice type by the process of step S710 shown in FIG. 45 and determining the operation type advance notice pattern by the process of step S714, the process of step S512 shown in FIG. 44 corresponds to the operation type notice pattern. A notice effect control pattern is determined. Thereafter, when operation detection control data included in the notice effect control pattern is read out by the process of step S533 shown in FIG. 47, an instruction based on the operation detection control data is obtained by the processes of steps S729 to S735 shown in FIG. Settings are made.

  Here, when it is determined in the process of step S729 that it is the push button effective detection period based on the operation detection control data or the like (step S729; Yes), the trigger button detection limit setting in step S730 sets the trigger button 31A. Restrict the pointing operation from being detected. Accordingly, when the “push button single shot” notice effect or the “push button repeated strike” notice effect is executed, and the effect content is changed according to the instruction operation on the push button 31B, the instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected. In other words, it is possible to prevent the contents of the presentation from being changed by an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A. At this time, the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A may be limited so as not to be detected.

  When it is determined that the trigger button valid detection period is reached in the process of step S732 based on the operation detection control data (step S732; Yes), the push button detection limit setting in step S733 is used to give an instruction to the push button 31B. Restrict operations from being detected. Accordingly, a “trigger button single shot” notice effect or a “trigger button repeated strike” notice effect is executed, and the contents of the effect are changed according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A and the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A. When the operation is performed, the instruction operation on the push button 31B is not detected, and the content of the effect is prevented from being changed by the instruction operation on the push button 31B.

  In the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, the push button has a higher rate than the operation type advance notice type of the trigger button repeated hit CBY4, regardless of which change pattern is specified by the change pattern specifying command. A determined value is assigned to each operation type advance notice type so as to be determined as the operation type advance notice type of continuous hit CBY2. Therefore, in the process of step S710 shown in FIG. 45, the decision to use the push button continuous stroke CBY2 as the operation type advance notice type is made at a higher rate than the decision to set the trigger button continuous hit CBY4 as the operation type notice type. . Accordingly, the frequency of execution of the “push button repeated hit” notice effect classified as the operation type advance notice type of the push button repeated hit CBY2 is the notice of the “trigger button repeat hit” classified as the operation type notice type of the trigger button repeated hit CBY4. The frequency is higher than the frequency at which the performance is executed. In this way, the execution frequency of the “trigger button repeated hit” notification effect that requires the repeated hit operation for the trigger button 31A, which is difficult to perform the repeated hit operation, is set to “push button repeated hit” that requires the repeated hit operation for the push button 31B that is easy to repeat. Lower than the execution frequency of the notice effect.

  When the notice effect of “push button repeated hits” is executed, a push button repeated hit process as shown in FIG. 49 is executed in step S731 of FIG. Whether or not to change the production contents according to the number of times of instruction operation detection for the push button 31B, the progress of the production contents in the notice production of the “push button repeated strike”, etc., by executing the process when the push button is repeatedly hit The contents of the production after the change is determined. Also, when the notice effect of “trigger button repeated hit” is executed, the trigger button repeated hit processing is executed in step S734 of FIG. Whether or not to change the content of the production, the content of the production after the change, etc. are determined in accordance with the progress of the content of the production in the notice production. Accordingly, when an instruction operation for the push button 31B is detected during the execution of the “push button repeated strike” notice effect, or when an instruction operation for the trigger button 31A is detected during the execution of the “trigger button repeat strike” notice effect. The production contents can be changed at different rates according to the progress of the production contents in each notice production.

  In the processing in step S803 and the processing in step S808 shown in FIG. 49, the setting of the effect change determination value can be varied according to the operation system notice pattern set as the usage pattern. Further, the same setting may be performed in the trigger button repeated hitting process. The possibility that the special figure display result will be a “big hit” (big hit reliability) is set to be different for each operation system notice pattern set as a use pattern. Therefore, changing the contents of the effect of the “push button repeated hit” notice effect and the “trigger button repeated hit” notice effect at different ratios depending on the possibility that the special figure display result will be a “hit hit” (big hit reliability) Can do.

  As described above, when one of the operation system notice types is determined in the process of step S710 shown in FIG. 45, “push button single shot” or “push button” is selected based on the operation system notice pattern determined in step S714. One of the notice effects can be executed among “continuous hit”, “trigger button single shot”, and “trigger button repeat hit”. In place of, or together with, these notice effects, for example, as a reach effect that is executed when the variable display state of the decorative symbol becomes the reach state, “single push button” or “push” The rendering operations such as “button hitting”, “trigger button single shot”, and “trigger button hitting” may be executed. That is, the tilt operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A and the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A are performed for a predetermined period after the display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol is started and the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed It is only necessary to select and execute either an effect operation in which the effect content changes in response to or an effect operation in which the effect content changes in response to an instruction operation on the push button 31B.

  For example, FIG. 38 shows a case where any one of the operations of “push button single shot”, “push button continuous stroke”, “trigger button single shot”, and “trigger button continuous stroke” is selected and executed as a reach effect. Whether or not to perform any of these effects may be determined in accordance with the variation pattern determined in step S273 based on the variation pattern type determined in step S271. Alternatively, when a variation pattern for executing a predetermined reach effect is specified by the change pattern specifying command, the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined reach effect determination process, thereby performing “push button single shot” or “push button repeated hitting”. It may be determined whether or not to perform any of the rendering operations of “trigger button single shot” and “trigger button continuous hit”. Here, since the variation pattern is determined based on the determination result of whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”, whether or not to perform any of the production operations as the reach production depends on the special figure display result Is determined based on the determination result of whether or not to be a “big hit”.

  In addition, as a probability change promotion effect that informs whether or not it is controlled to the probability variation state after the ornament symbol of the non-probability variation jackpot combination is stopped and displayed in the variable display of the ornament symbol, “single push button” or “push button push” , “Trigger button single shot” and “trigger button repeated stroke” may be performed. For example, when the determined decorative symbol of the non-probable variation jackpot combination is derived and displayed and controlled to the jackpot gaming state, based on the fact that it is determined that there is a jackpot promotion effect by the processing of step S556 shown in FIG. S556; Yes), through the processing of steps S557 to S562, the probability variation promotion effect pattern corresponding to the execution period (timing) of the jackpot promotion effect and the contents of the effect is determined.

  In the process of step S560, the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (promotion) is determined depending on whether the promotion failure effect is to notify that it is not controlled to the probability change state or the promotion failure effect to notify that it is controlled to the probability change state. One of the determination tables is selected from 144A at the time of failure and the probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table (at the time of successful promotion) 144B. Probability promotion effect pattern ZAP1-1, probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP1-2, probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP1-1 that can be determined by referring to 144A of probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (at the time of promotion failure) shown in FIG. , The probability variation promotion effect pattern ZBP1-2 is to execute the probability variation promotion effect of "single push button", "push push button", "single trigger button", and "trigger trigger button" respectively, as shown in FIG. belongs to. The probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP2-1, the probability change promotion effect pattern ZAP2-2, and the probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP2-1 that can be determined by referring to the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (when promotion is successful) 144B shown in FIG. , The probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP2-2 is for executing the probability change promotion effect of "single push button", "push push button", "single trigger button", and "trigger trigger button" respectively, as shown in FIG. belongs to.

  In the probability change promotion effect of “single trigger button” or “triggering of trigger button”, the content of the effect is changed according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A and the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A. On the other hand, in the probability change promotion effect of “single push button” or “push button push”, the content of the effect is changed according to the instruction operation to the push button 31B. In the probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table 144A (when promotion is unsuccessful) shown in FIG. 22A and the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table 144B (when promotion is successful) 144B shown in FIG. Depending on the execution of the promotion effect which is (timing), the assignment of the decision value to each probability variation promotion effect pattern is different.

  As an example, in the probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table (at the time of promotion failure) 144A shown in FIG. 22A, when the promotion effect execution time is “end time”, the promotion effect execution time is “third round”. Compared with the case, the assignment of the determined value to the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZBP1-1 corresponding to the probability variation promotion effect of “trigger button single shot” is reduced. Also, in the probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table (when promotion is successful) 144B shown in FIG. 22B, when the promotion effect execution time is “end time” and the promotion effect execution time is “third round”. As compared with the above, the assignment of the decision value to the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZBP2-1 corresponding to the probability variation promotion effect of “single trigger button” is reduced.

  In this way, in the ending effect executed at the end of the big hit gaming state, the rate at which the probability change promotion effect of “single trigger button” is executed as the high hit effect during the big hit is reduced. Here, at the end of the big hit gaming state, a ball removal operation for discharging the gaming ball paid out as a winning ball from the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is often performed. In this ball removal operation, the same left hand as the operation hand for holding the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is used. Therefore, if the ball removal work and the probability change promotion effect of “single trigger button” or “triggering the trigger button” compete, the player's willingness to participate in the probability change promotion effect decreases. Therefore, in the period when the ball removal work is often performed, the rate at which the probability change promotion effect such as “single trigger button” is executed is reduced to prevent the player's willingness to participate in the probability change promotion effect from decreasing. . It should be noted that a period during which ball removal work is often performed may be specified in advance based on game statistics and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table (when promotion fails) 144A shown in FIG. 22 (A) and the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (when promotion is successful) 144B shown in FIG. A decision value is assigned to each probability variation promotion effect pattern so that the decision ratio is different. As an example, in any of the promotion effects, the probability change promotion effect pattern corresponding to the probability change promotion effect of “single trigger button” is shown in the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table 144B (when promotion is successful) shown in FIG. The assignment of the decision value to ZBP2-1 corresponds to the probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP1-1 corresponding to the probability change promotion effect of “single trigger button” in the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (when promotion fails) 144A shown in FIG. It is set to be larger than the allocation of the decision value. Therefore, it is possible to determine the contents of the effect in the probability variation promotion effect at a different rate depending on whether or not the probability variation state is controlled after the big hit gaming state. For example, when the probability change promotion effect of “trigger button single shot” is executed, there is a possibility that notification that the promotion success effect will be in the probability change state compared to when another type of probability change promotion effect is executed ( (Reliability) increases.

  In the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table 144A (when promotion fails) shown in FIG. 22 (A), the probability change promotion effect pattern ZBP1-2 corresponding to the probability change promotion effect of “trigger button continuous hit” is observed at any promotion effect execution time. A determined value is assigned to each probability-changed promotion effect pattern so that the probability-changed promotion effect pattern ZAP1-2 corresponding to the probability-changed promotion effect of “push button repeated hits” is determined at a higher rate than that. In addition, in the probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table 144B (when promotion is successful) shown in FIG. 22B, the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZBP2 corresponding to the probability variation promotion effect of “trigger button repeated hit” is observed at any promotion effect execution time. A determined value is assigned to each probability-changed promotion effect pattern so that the probability-changed promotion effect pattern ZAP2-2 corresponding to the probability-changed promotion effect of “push button continuous strike” is determined at a higher rate than -2. Therefore, in the process of step S562 shown in FIG. 50, the decision to make the probability change promotion effect of “push button continuous strike” is made at a higher rate than the decision to make the probability change promotion effect of “trigger button repeated strike”. . Therefore, the frequency at which the probability change promotion effect of “push button repeated hits” is executed is higher than the frequency at which the probability change promotion effect of “trigger button hits” is executed. In this way, the execution frequency of the “probability trigger promotion effect” of “trigger button continuous hit”, which requires a continuous hit operation on the trigger button 31A, which is difficult to repeatedly hit, is set to the “push button continuous hit required for the push button 31B which is easy to repeat. ”Is reduced below the frequency of execution of the probable promotion effect.

  Also in the big hit effect process of step S176 shown in FIG. 43, the same process as the effect control command process shown in FIG. Is determined (step S729; Yes), the trigger button detection limit setting in step S730 restricts the instruction operation to the trigger button 31A from being detected. When it is determined that the trigger button valid detection period is reached in the process of step S732 based on the operation detection control data (step S732; Yes), the push button detection limit setting in step S733 is used to give an instruction to the push button 31B. Restrict operations from being detected.

  Therefore, when the probability change promotion effect of “push button single shot” or the probability change promotion effect of “push button continuous hit” is executed and the effect content is changed according to the instruction operation on the push button 31B, the instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is This prevents the contents of the presentation from being changed by an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A without being detected. At this time, the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A may be limited so as not to be detected. Further, the probability change promotion effect of “single trigger button” and the probability change promotion effect of “trigger button continuous hit” are executed, and the contents of the effect are given according to the tilting operation with respect to the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 and the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A. When the change is made, the instruction operation for the push button 31B is not detected, and it is prevented that the content of the effect is changed by the instruction operation for the push button 31B.

  Furthermore, when the probability change promotion effect of “push button repeated hits” is executed, the push button repeated hit process shown in FIG. 49 may be executed. Thus, whether or not to change the production content, the production content after the change, etc., depending on the number of detections of the instruction operation for the push button 31B, the progress status of the production content in the probability change promotion production of “push button continuous hit”, etc. Is determined. Further, when the probability change promotion effect of “trigger button repeated hit” is executed, the trigger button repeated hit process is executed as in the process of step S734 shown in FIG. In addition, whether or not to change the content of the production, the content of the production after the change, and the like are determined according to the progress of the content of the production in the probable promotion effect of “triggering the trigger button”. Accordingly, when an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected during execution of the probability change promotion effect of “push button continuous hit”, or an instruction operation on the trigger button 31A is detected during execution of the probability change promotion effect of “trigger button continuous hit”. In the event of a change, the contents of the effects can be changed at different rates depending on the progress of the contents of the effects in each of the probable promotion effects.

  At this time, the effect change determination value set in the process of step S803 or the process of step S808 shown in FIG. 49 may be varied according to the probability variation promotion effect pattern set as the use pattern. Further, the same setting may be performed in the trigger button repeated hitting process. And the possibility (reliability) of notification that it will be in the probability change state by the promotion success effect is set to be different for each type of the probability change promotion effect corresponding to the probability change promotion effect pattern set as the usage pattern. Yes. Therefore, the contents of the performance in the probability change promotion effect of “Push Button Strike” and the probability change promotion effect of “Trigger Button Strike” at different rates depending on the probability (reliability) of being controlled to the probability change state after the big hit gaming state Can be changed.

  As described above, when it is determined in step S556 shown in FIG. 50 that there is a jackpot promotion effect, “push button single shot” or “push button continuous hitting” is performed based on the probability variation promotion effect pattern determined in step S562. ”,“ Single trigger button ”, or“ triggering the trigger button ”can be executed. Instead of the probable change promotion effect which becomes such a jackpot promotion effect, or together with these jackpot promotion results, for example, as a re-lottery effect that becomes a change promotion effect, “single push button”, “push push button”, “trigger” Probability promotion promotion effects of “single button” and “triggering of trigger button” may be executed. In other words, after the decorative symbol of the non-probable big hit combination is derived and displayed, the stick controller 30 is directed according to the tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A and the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A during the predetermined period until the big hit gaming state is finished. It is only necessary to select and execute either an effect operation whose contents change and an effect operation whose effect contents change in response to an instruction operation on the push button 31B.

  When selecting and executing any one of the operations of “push button single shot”, “push button continuous stroke”, “trigger button single shot”, or “trigger button continuous stroke” as the re-lottery effect, Similarly to the case, based on the variation pattern type determined in step S271 shown in FIG. 38, whether or not to execute any of these effect operations corresponding to the variation pattern determined in step S273. It may be determined. Alternatively, in the process of step S509 shown in FIG. 44, it is determined whether or not to execute the re-lottery effect that is the promotion effect during the change, and as the effect operation in the case of executing, “single push button” or “push push button repeatedly” Any one of “single trigger button” and “trigger trigger button” may be determined.

  51 to 53 show display operation examples in the image display device 5 when the probability change promotion effect of “single trigger button” or “trigger trigger button repeated” is executed as a re-lottery effect that becomes a promotion effect during change. ing. In this display operation example, after the decorative symbols are changed in all of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R, for example, as shown in FIG. In addition, decorative symbols indicating the number “6”, which is a non-probable variable symbol, are displayed on the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. In the area 5C, the decorative symbols are continuously changed so that the variable display state of the decorative symbols becomes the reach state. After the reach effect based on the reach state is executed in this way, as shown in FIG. 51B, for example, a non-probable big hit combination is configured corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. The decorative symbol to be displayed is temporarily stopped.

  As a specific example, when it is determined in the process of step S509 shown in FIG. 44 that a “trigger button single shot” probability change promotion effect is to be executed, for example, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion effect that promotes a tilt operation with respect to 30A and an instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A is performed. Thereafter, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 51 (D1) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a trigger button effective detection period for effectively detecting various operations on the stick controller 30 is entered.

  After the display operation shown in FIG. 51 (D1) is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (A1), the display position of the effect image of the aim (scope) aiming at the flying airplane (enemy aircraft) is changed. Display as possible. This effect image is switched and displayed so that the display position can be changed in accordance with the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A as shown in FIG. 52 (A2). As an example, when the tilt direction sensor unit 32 detects that the operating rod 30 </ b> A is tilted to the back as viewed from the player by the pair of vertical sensors, the aim moves upward in the display area of the image display device 5. On the other hand, when it is detected that the camera has been tilted to the near side, the effect image is switched and displayed so that the aim is moved downward. Further, in the tilt direction sensor unit 32, when it is detected by the parallel sensor pair that the operating rod 30A is tilted to the left side as viewed from the player, the aim is moved to the left side and tilted to the right side. When it is detected, the effect image is switched and displayed so that the aim moves in the right direction. When the tilting operation of the operating rod 30A is detected by both the vertical sensor pair and the parallel sensor pair, the effect image is such that the aim moves in a direction (for example, the upper left direction) in which the detection results of each sensor pair are combined. Is displayed. The display position of the aiming image is not displayed so as to be changeable. For example, when the operation rod 30A is tilted toward the front side, the effect image switching display corresponding to the fact that the own plane (own aircraft) faces upward is performed. Any rendering operation corresponding to the detection result of the tilting operation may be executed. The process for realizing such an effect operation may be included in the trigger button single-shot process executed in step S734 of FIG. 48, for example.

  Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (B1), when the aim is matched with the enemy aircraft, the operation of the stick controller 30 is stopped as shown in FIG. 52 (B2) to aim down the enemy aircraft. It is sufficient if it can be determined. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 52 (C2), in response to one push-pull operation on the trigger button 31A, for example, an effect image in which a shell is fired once as shown in FIG. 52 (C1). Is displayed. Subsequently, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 52 (D) is shot down, and a decorative pattern indicating the number “7” is aligned to display a decorative pattern of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. It is only necessary that the definite decorative symbol of the probable big hit combination is derived and displayed by, for example, stopping display in the areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  As another example, when it is determined in the process of step S509 shown in FIG. 44 to execute the probability change promotion effect of “trigger button continuous hit”, for example, as shown in FIG. An operation promotion effect is urged to prompt a continuous operation that is a tilting operation with respect to or a continuous instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A. Thereafter, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 51 (D2) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a trigger button effective detection period in which various operations on the stick controller 30 are detected effectively.

  After the display operation shown in FIG. 51 (D2) is performed, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (A1), the display position of the effect image of the aim (scope) aiming at the flying airplane (enemy aircraft) is changed. Display as possible. This effect image is switched and displayed so that the display position can be changed according to the tilting operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A as shown in FIG. 53 (A2). Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (B1), when the aim is matched with the enemy aircraft, the operation of the stick controller 30 is stopped as shown in FIG. 53 (B2) to aim down the enemy aircraft. It is sufficient if it can be determined. At this time, for example, as shown in FIG. 53 (C2), in response to a plurality of push-pull operations performed on the trigger button 31A, for example, an effect image that fires a shell multiple times as shown in FIG. 53 (C1). Is displayed. Then, for example, when the number of detection operations (total number) of instruction operations for the trigger button 31A has reached a predetermined number, an effect image “7” is shot together with an effect image in which an enemy aircraft is shot down as shown in FIG. If fixed decorative symbols of probability variation big hit combinations are derived and displayed by arranging the decorative symbols indicating numbers together and displaying them in the “left”, “middle”, “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, 5R, etc. Good.

  In the case of a successful promotion effect, as shown in FIGS. 52 (D) and 53 (D), the display of the effect image in which the enemy aircraft is shot down is displayed, and the definite decorative combination of the probable big hit combination is derived and displayed. In this way, a notification that the state of probability change is reached is performed. On the other hand, in the case of the promotion failure effect, for example, the effect image is switched and displayed so that the aim does not coincide with the enemy aircraft even if any tilting operation on the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 is detected, or Even if the aim is matched with the enemy aircraft, display an effect image in which the shell does not hit the enemy aircraft and the enemy aircraft is not shot down, or display an effect image in which the enemy aircraft is not shot down even if the enemy aircraft hits the bullet For example, the definite decorative symbol of the non-probable variation big hit combination may be derived and displayed, and the notification that the probability variation state may be obtained is not performed.

  FIG. 54 shows an example of a display operation in the image display device 5 in which the probability change promotion effect of “single push button” or “push button push-up” is executed as a re-lottery effect that becomes a promotion effect during change. In this display operation example as well, as shown in FIGS. 51A and 51B, for example, as shown in FIG. 51B, a non-probable variable big hit combination is used corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “big hit”. The decorative symbols that make up are temporarily stopped.

  As a specific example, when it is determined in step S509 shown in FIG. 44 that a “push button single shot” probability change promotion effect is to be executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (C1), a probability change promotion effect is executed. For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (D1), an operation promotion effect that prompts an instruction operation on the push button 31B is performed. Thereafter, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 54 (E1) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a push button effective detection period in which an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected effectively. Subsequently, in response to a single pressing operation on the push button 31 during the push button validity detection period, for example, a decoration showing a numeral “7” together with an effect image as shown in FIG. 54 (F1). The fixed decorative symbols of the probable variation big hit combination may be derived and displayed by displaying the symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  As another example, when it is determined in the process of step S509 shown in FIG. 44 that the probability variation promotion effect of “push button continuous hitting” is executed, the probability variation promotion effect is executed, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (C2). After the effect image for informing the effect is displayed, for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (D2), an operation promotion effect that promotes a continuous hitting operation that is a continuous instruction operation to the push button 31B is performed. Thereafter, for example, an effect image as shown in FIG. 54 (E2) is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5, and a push button validity detection period in which an instruction operation on the push button 31B is detected effectively. Subsequently, in response to a plurality of pressing operations performed on the push button 31B during the push button validity detection period, for example, a decoration indicating a numeral “7” together with an effect image as shown in FIG. 54 (F2). The fixed decorative symbols of the probable variation big hit combination may be derived and displayed by displaying the symbols in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

  In the case of a successful promotion effect, the display of the effect image as shown in FIG. 54 (F1) and FIG. 54 (F2) and the like, and the definite decorative combination of the probability variation big hit combination is derived and displayed. A notification to that effect is made. On the other hand, in the case of a promotion failure production, for example, by displaying an effect image that loses in roulette or displaying an effect image that loses the tug of war, a definite decorative combination of non-probable big hit combinations is derived. In addition to being displayed, it is only necessary that the notification that the state of certainty is changed is not performed.

  Next, specific examples of control and effect display when a stop symbol notice effect is executed will be described.

  FIG. 55 shows a variable display effect process (step S172) when it is determined in the stop symbol notice effect setting process (step S511) shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows the flow of the concrete production | generation operation | movement in). The following process is realized by the effect control CPU 120 executing the process of step S172.

  When it is determined to execute the stop symbol advancement effect accompanied by the button operation promotion effect, after the change of the decorative symbol is started in the image display device 5 (step S1001), the advancement determined in step S761 of FIG. The symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 (step S1002).

  Thereafter, an operation promotion effect such as displaying an image of the push button 31B on the image display device 5 is performed (step S1003).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of operations (predetermined number of times) determined in step S762 of FIG. 46 is detected for the push button 31B within a predetermined operation valid period (steps S1004 and S1005). .

  When a predetermined number of operations are detected within the operation valid period (step S1005; Yes), the notice symbol displayed on the image display device 5 is changed (step S1006). Thereafter, the decorative symbol corresponding to the notice symbol changed in step S1006 is stopped on the image display device 5 (step S1007).

  If the operation valid period has passed without a predetermined number of operations being detected (step S1004; No), the decorative symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is temporarily displayed (step S1008), and then the right decorative symbol is displayed. The effect of “slip” to be changed is executed (step S1008).

  The decorative symbols to be stopped and displayed are determined in steps S503, S504, S506, 507, and S508 in FIG. In this embodiment, without changing the decorative design determined in these processes, the effect of “slip” as in step S1008 described above is executed, so that the determined content and the decorative design to be stopped are displayed. Consistency is maintained.

  FIG. 56 is a time flow of effects when it is determined in the stop symbol advancement effect setting process (step S511) shown in FIG. 46 that the stop symbol advancement effect with operation is executed.

  FIG. 56A is a time flow when the push button 31B is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within the operation effective period when the stop symbol notice effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 56 (A), in this case, after the effect branch timing (for example, at the end of the operation valid period), the left and right decorative symbols are stopped, and then pseudo-continuous variation and reach effect are executed.

  FIG. 56B is a time flow when the push button 31B is not operated a predetermined number of times within the operation effective period when the stop symbol notice effect is being executed. As shown in FIG. 56B, in this case, after the effect branch timing (for example, at the end of the operation effective period), the “slip” effect is executed, and then the left and right decorative symbols are stopped. Variations and reach production are performed. As shown in FIG. 56 (B), when the “slip” effect is executed, the variation time may be adjusted by changing the effect content, such as omitting a part of the reach effect, In the case of the variation pattern in which the reach effect is executed after the continuous variation is performed, the pseudo continuous variation is performed at an earlier timing than the case shown in FIG. 56A (that is, the pseudo continuous rendering time is shortened). In other words, the reach effect may be started at the same timing as in FIG.

  Thus, regardless of the presence / absence of the predetermined operation on the push button 31B, the entire contents of the production are determined according to the presence / absence of the predetermined operation on the push button 31B so that the variation ends within the predetermined variation time. Branch.

  FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 show a case where the variable display result is a “big hit” and a variation pattern that does not accompany the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, and a stop symbol notice effect with a button operation promotion effect is executed ( It is a figure which shows the example of a display operation of the stop symbol notification effect pattern TZP2-2) shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (B), in the image display device 5, after all the decorative symbols have started to change, as shown in FIG. 57 (C), for example, translucent or dotted numbers are used. The notice symbol to be displayed is displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. Here, it is assumed that it is determined in step S760 in FIG. 46 that the notice symbol is displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At this time, the combination of the notice symbols displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R does not constitute a reach state or a chance eye, and the player becomes “lost”. Recognize.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 57D, a button operation promotion effect is displayed in which an image that prompts the user to repeatedly push the push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5.

  If the push button 31B is operated the number of times determined in step S765 of FIG. 46 within the operation valid period, the image of the hammer is displayed and the “right” decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 57 (F), the notice symbol in the symbol display area 5R is changed and the notice symbol in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5R is displayed in the “left” ornament symbol display area 5L. It will be changed to the same notice pattern. Thereby, a player comes to recognize that it becomes reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 57 (G) and 57 (H), in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, the decorative symbol corresponding to the warning symbol (for example, the display manner is different from the warning symbol). As shown in FIG. 57 (I), decorative symbols indicating the same numbers as “left” and “right” are also stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. .

  On the other hand, when the push button 31B is not operated for the number of times determined in step S765 of FIG. 46 within the operation effective period at the stage of FIG. 57D, as shown in FIG. The notice symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is not changed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (F), a decoration symbol corresponding to the notice symbol (for example, a black number having a different display form from the notice symbol) is stopped and displayed in the “left” ornament symbol display area 5L. As shown in 58 (G) to (I), after the decorative symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is temporarily stopped in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol is changed due to the effect of “slip”. Is done. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 58 (J), the decorative symbols indicating the same numbers as “left” and “right” are also stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C. As described above, even when the push button 31B is not operated a predetermined number of times, it is possible to match the display result determined in advance by executing the “slip” effect. In addition, the contents of the effect can be branched so that the variation ends within a predetermined variation time regardless of the presence or absence of a predetermined operation on the push button 31B.

  FIGS. 59 and 60 show a case where the variable display result is a “big hit” and a variation pattern with a variable display effect of “pseudo-run”, and a stop symbol notice effect with a button operation promotion effect is executed (FIG. 59). 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display operation of the stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP3-2) illustrated in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (A) and 59 (B), in the image display device 5, after all the decorative symbols start to change, as shown in FIG. 59 (C), for example, semi-transparent or dotted numbers are used. The notice symbol shown is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Here, it is assumed that it is determined in step S760 in FIG. 46 that the notice symbol is displayed only in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59D, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. At this time, the combination of the notice symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbol stopped in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L constitutes a reach state or a chance eye. The player recognizes that it will be “losing”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (E), a button operation promotion effect is displayed in which an image that prompts the user to repeatedly push the push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5.

  If the push button 31B is operated the number of times determined in step S765 of FIG. 46 within the operation valid period, an image of the hand is displayed and a “right” decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (F). As shown in FIG. 59 (G), the notice symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. It is changed to one constituting a part of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes (here, pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC7) in combination with the notice symbol. As a result, the player expects that a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect will be executed and that the possibility of a “hit” will increase.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (H), in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, a decorative symbol corresponding to the warning symbol (for example, a black numeral having a different display form from the warning symbol) is stopped and displayed. As shown in FIG. 59 (I), in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, a combination of “left” and “right” constitutes a pseudo consecutive chance (here, pseudo continuous chance GC7). Is stopped.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (I), all the decorative symbols change again. Thereafter, the pseudo continuous variation corresponding to the variation pattern is executed, and as shown in FIG. 59 (K), decorations constituting the reach state are displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. As shown in FIG. 59 (L), the decorative symbols indicating the same numbers as “left” and “right” are also stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C.

  On the other hand, when the push button 31B is not operated for the number of times determined in step S765 of FIG. 46 within the operation effective period at the stage of FIG. 59 (E), it is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. The displayed notice symbol will not be changed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 60F to 60H, after the decorative symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is temporarily displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, the decorative effect is produced by the effect of “slip”. The symbol is changed to a decorative symbol constituting a pseudo continuous chance eye (here, pseudo continuous chance GC7). After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (I), the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C is also configured with a pseudo-continuous chance (here, pseudo-continuous chance GC7) in combination with “left” and “right”. The decorative pattern to be stopped is displayed. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIGS. 59 (J) to (L) is executed. As described above, even when the push button 31B is not operated a predetermined number of times, it is possible to match the display result determined in advance by executing the “slip” effect. In addition, the contents of the effect can be branched so that the variation ends within a predetermined variation time regardless of the presence or absence of a predetermined operation on the push button 31B.

  61 and 62 show a case where the variable display result is a “big hit” and a variation pattern with a variable display effect of “pseudo-run”, and a stop symbol notice effect with a button operation promotion effect is executed (FIG. 61). It is a figure which shows the other example of a display operation of the stop symbol notification effect pattern TZP3-3) shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B), in the image display device 5, after all the decorative symbols start to change, as shown in FIG. 61 (C), for example, semi-transparent or dotted numbers are used. The notice symbol to be displayed is displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. Here, it is assumed that it is determined in step S760 in FIG. 46 that the notice symbol is displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. At this time, the combination of the notice symbols displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R constitutes the reach state, and the player recognizes that the player will reach.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 61D, a button operation promotion effect is displayed in which an image that prompts the user to repeatedly push the push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5.

  When the push button 31B is operated the number of times determined in step S765 of FIG. 46 within the operation valid period, as shown in FIG. 61E, an image of the foot is displayed and a “right” decoration is displayed. As shown in FIG. 61 (F), the notice symbol in the symbol display area 5R is kicked, and the notice symbol in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5R is moved to the “middle” ornament symbol display area 5C. . As a result, the combination of the notice symbols displayed in the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C constitutes a part of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes (here, pseudo pseudo chance eyes GC7). . In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-changes) increases, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases. As a result, the player expects that a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect will be executed and that the possibility of a “hit” will increase. In FIG. 61 (F), the notice symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R may be changed to a notice symbol (here “8”) that constitutes a part of the pseudo-continuous chance. However, as shown in FIG. 61F, by executing the effect that the notice symbol in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is moved to the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C, the variable display result is “big hit”. It can be expected that a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect will be executed while leaving the possibility of becoming.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 61 (G), a decorative symbol corresponding to the notice symbol (for example, a black number having a different display form from the notice symbol) is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. As shown in FIG. 61 (H), the decorative symbol constituting the pseudo-continuous chance eye GC7 is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. As shown in FIG. 61 (I), the “medium” decorative symbol is displayed. Also in the symbol display area 5C, the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo consecutive chance GC7 are stopped and displayed in combination with “left” and “right”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 61 (J), all the decorative symbols change again. Thereafter, the pseudo continuous variation corresponding to the variation pattern is executed, and as shown in FIG. 61 (K), the decorations constituting the reach state are displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. As shown in FIG. 61 (L), the decorative symbols indicating the same numbers as “left” and “right” are also stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C.

  On the other hand, when the push button 31B is not operated for the number of times determined in step S765 of FIG. 46 within the operation effective period at the stage of FIG. 61D, as shown in FIG. The notice symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is not changed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (F), after the decorative symbol corresponding to the notice symbol (for example, a black number having a different display form from the notice symbol) is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. 62 (G) to (I), after the decorative symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, the decorative symbol is produced by the effect of “slip”. Is changed to a decorative pattern constituting a pseudo continuous chance eye (here, pseudo continuous chance GC7). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (I), the “continuous chance chance GC7” is formed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C in combination with “left” and “right”. The decorative pattern to be stopped is displayed. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIGS. 61 (J) to (L) is executed. As described above, even when the push button 31B is not operated a predetermined number of times, it is possible to match the effect content (execution of “pseudo-continuous”) determined in advance by executing the effect of “slip”. . In addition, the contents of the effect can be branched so that the variation ends within a predetermined variation time regardless of the presence or absence of a predetermined operation on the push button 31B.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the above-described embodiment, first, the reach state and the notice symbol that does not constitute a part of the pseudo-continuous chance GC1 to GC8 are displayed, and the push button 31B is operated a predetermined number of times. In such a case, it is possible to execute a stop symbol notice effect that changes to a notice symbol that constitutes a part of a special display mode such as the reach state or the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8. By executing such a stop symbol notice effect, it becomes possible to produce an effect that makes it appear as if a reach or `` pseudo-ream '' has occurred by the player's operation, and can promote the player's operation, The fun of gaming is improved.

  In addition, a notice symbol constituting the reach state is displayed, and when the push button 31B is operated a predetermined number of times, a stop symbol notice effect that changes to a notice symbol constituting a part of the pseudo consecutive chances GC1 to GC8 is also provided. It is executable. In this embodiment, in the variable display effect of “pseudo-continuous”, as the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations (re-changes) increases, the possibility that the variable display result becomes “big hit” increases. By executing such a stop symbol notice effect, it is possible to produce an effect that increases the expectation of becoming a “hit” by the player's operation, and the player's operation can be promoted. Interest is improved.

  In this embodiment, it is possible to execute a stop symbol notice effect for displaying a notice symbol only in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5R or in the “left” and “right” ornament symbol display areas 5L and 5R. ing. When displaying the notice symbol in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R, depending on whether the combination of the two notice symbols constitutes the reach state or the pseudo-continuous chance, In the case of displaying the notice pattern only in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L, The subsequent display mode can be notified in advance by a combination with the notification symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. In this way, by providing a plurality of patterns for displaying the notice symbol, it is possible to make the effect surprising.

  When the push button 31B is not operated for a predetermined number of times in the stop symbol notice effect in which the button operation promotion effect is executed, the decoration symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is stopped and displayed. Are different from each other, so that an effect similar to the variable display effect of “slip” is executed to change the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed. By doing in this way, regardless of the presence or absence of a player's operation, the book length of the production time determined beforehand and the content of production can be matched.

  In the setting of the required operation number determination table 147, if the number of operations (pushing the push button 31B) required for changing the notice symbol is small, the reach ratio and the reliability that the variable display result is “big hit” can be obtained. It is getting higher. Thus, since the player can recognize the reliability by operating, the player's willingness to operate the operation means (push button 31B) can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Also, a trigger that is provided at a predetermined position of the stick controller 30 that can be held and tilted by the player and that allows the player to perform an instruction operation such as a push-pull operation while holding the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30. An effect operation such as “single trigger button” and “trigger trigger button” in response to an instruction operation on the button 31A and an instruction such as a pressing operation by a player are provided at a predetermined position on an upper plate or the like separate from the stick controller 30. It is possible to selectively execute any one of the presentation operations of “single push button” and “push button push” according to the instruction operation on the push button 31B that can be operated. Thereby, various effects using the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B can be executed to improve the game entertainment.

  Also, based on the result of determining whether or not the special figure display result is “big hit”, any one of “push button single shot”, “push button single shot”, “trigger button single shot”, or “trigger button continuous hit” It is determined whether or not to perform the production operation as a reach production or a notice production. This makes it possible to improve the game entertainment by changing the expectation that the special figure display result will be “big hit” depending on which of the performance operations is executed.

  For example, in the operation type advance notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16B, when the action type advance notice type of the trigger button single CBY3 is determined and the notice effect of “single trigger button” is executed, the single push button CBY1 is selected. From the time when the operation type advance notice type is determined and the “push button single shot” notice effect is executed, or when the time is determined as the operation type notice type of the push button repeated hit CBY2 and the “push button repeated hit” notice effect is executed In addition, a determination value is assigned to each operation type notice type so that the possibility that the special figure display result becomes “big hit” is high. Thereby, when the performance operation using the operation stick 30A of the stick controller 30 or the trigger button 31A is executed, the expectation that the special figure display result becomes “big hit” can be enhanced, and the game entertainment can be improved.

  When it is determined in step S729 shown in FIG. 48 that it is the push button effective detection period, the tilt operation of the stick controller 30 with respect to the operating rod 30A and the instruction operation with respect to the trigger button 31A are performed by the trigger button detection limit setting in step S730. Restrict it from being detected. If it is determined in step S732 that the trigger button validity detection period is in effect, the push button detection restriction setting in step S733 restricts the instruction operation to the push button 31B from being detected. Thereby, only the appropriate operation according to the content of the production is detected, the content of the production is changed, and the change of the content of the production due to an inappropriate operation is prevented, so that the effect of the production can be enhanced and the game entertainment can be improved. .

  When the “pseudo-ream” variable display effect is executed, there is no operation system advance notice or each operation at a different rate depending on the total number of pseudo-ream fluctuations and the number of pseudo-ream fluctuations. It is determined as a system notice type. As a result, the “push button single shot”, “push button single shot”, “trigger button single shot”, “trigger button continuous shot” ”Can enhance the sense of expectation through the execution of the production operation such as“, ”and can improve the game entertainment.

  When the gaming state is changing the latent probability, it is determined that there is no operation system advance notice or each operation system advance notice type at a rate different from that in the normal state. Thereby, depending on whether or not any of the performance operations is executed, the expectation that the latent probability is being changed can be varied to improve the game entertainment.

  There is no operation system advance notice or each operation at a different rate depending on whether the notice effect of “step-up display” is executed and the number of steps (number of steps) in which the notice mode changes when executed. It is determined as a system notice type. As a result, in accordance with the advancement of expectation according to the notice effect of “step-up display”, the execution of the effect operations such as “single push button”, “push push button”, “single trigger button”, “trigger trigger button” Can increase the sense of expectation and improve the game entertainment.

  There is no operation system advance notice or each operation system advance notice type at a different ratio depending on the total number of reserved memories, the number of special figure reservation memories, or the number of special figure reservation memories as the second special figure hold memory number. The Thus, for example, if the ratio determined without operating system advance notice is increased as the number of special figure hold memory increases, the operating rate of the gaming machine is prevented from being lowered due to the prolonged variable display time, and the gaming entertainment is improved. Can do. Or, for example, when the number of special figure hold memories is greater than or equal to a predetermined number, the rate at which the effect operation of “single trigger button” is performed is increased compared to when the number is less than the predetermined number. , It is possible to increase the willingness to participate in the production and improve the game entertainment.

  When the gaming state is a high base state, it is determined that there is no operation system advance notice or each operation system advance notice type at a different rate from that in the normal state or the latency probability change. Accordingly, for example, if the ratio determined without notice of the operation system is increased in the high base state, it is possible to prevent the game from being extended in the high base due to the extension of the variable display time and to improve the gaming interest. .

  Operation type advance notice type determination table 140B shown in FIG. 16 (B), probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table (when promotion fails) 144A shown in FIG. 22 (A), probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (FIG. 22B) ( At the time of successful promotion) 144B and the like, a decision value is assigned so that the decision to execute the “push button repeated strike” effect operation is made at a higher rate than the “trigger button repeated strike” effect operation. . Thereby, the execution frequency of the production | presentation operation | movement requested | required of continuous operation with respect to the trigger button 31A of the stick controller 30 with difficult continuous operation is reduced, a player's willingness to participate can be raised, and game entertainment can be improved.

  In the push button continuous hitting process shown in FIG. 49, the effect change determination value is determined so as to determine whether or not to change the effect content at a different rate depending on the progress of the effect content and to determine the effect content after the change. Etc. are set. As a result, it is possible to enhance the effect of the game by enhancing the effect of the effects of the “triggering of the trigger button” and the “pulsing of the push button”.

  Also, in the push button continuous hitting process shown in FIG. 49, the effect change is performed so that whether or not to change the effect content at a different rate depending on the operation system notice pattern and the like, and the effect content after the change is determined. Depending on whether or not the judgment value is set and the special figure display result is “big hit”, the ratio of determining whether or not to change the production contents and the ratio of determining the production contents after the change are different. Make it. As a result, it is possible to improve the game entertainment interest by changing the expectation that the special figure display result will be “big hit” according to the change in the production contents in the production operation of “triggering of trigger button” and “pushing of push button” .

  In the probability variation promotion effect pattern determination table (when promotion is failed) 144A shown in FIG. 22A and the probability change promotion effect pattern determination table (when promotion is successful) 144B shown in FIG. 22B, the execution period (timing) of the probability change promotion effect is shown. Each probability variation promotion effect pattern is determined at a different rate depending on the execution of the promotion effect. Thus, for example, when a player is highly likely to perform a ball removal operation, if the execution frequency of the probability change promotion effect of “single trigger button” is reduced, the player's willingness to participate is improved and the gaming interest is improved. Can do. In addition, the ratio determined for the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZBP1-2 and the probability variation promotion effect pattern ZBP2-2 for executing the probability change promotion effect of “trigger button continuous hit” is the ratio determined for other probability change promotion effect patterns. The decision value is assigned so as to be lower than that. As a result, for example, the player is required to perform complicated operation actions by reducing the frequency of execution of the probable promotion promotion effect of “triggering the trigger button” during a big hit gaming state in which the player is likely to perform a beating operation, etc. By making it difficult for the certainty promotion promotion effect to be executed, it is possible to increase the player's willingness to participate and improve the gaming interest.

  The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and various modifications and applications are possible. In the above embodiment, when the push button 31B is not operated a predetermined number of times in the stop symbol notice effect in which the button operation promotion effect is executed, the decorative symbol corresponding to the notice symbol is stopped and displayed. Since it is different from the decorative pattern that has been determined, the same decorative operation as the “slip” variable display effect is executed to change the decorative pattern to be stopped and displayed, thereby matching the predetermined decorative pattern. I was trying to do it (matching the bottom line of the production). Without being limited to this, when the push button 31B has not been operated a predetermined number of times, the decorative symbol corresponding to the notice symbol may be stopped and displayed without changing the notice symbol. For example, if the variable display result is “losing”, the push button 31B has not been operated a predetermined number of times because it is only necessary to derive and display a combination that does not constitute “big hit” or various chances. In this case, without changing the notice symbol, the ornament symbols corresponding to the notice symbol are stopped in the “left” and “right” ornament symbol display areas 5L and 5R, and the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C is displayed. May be controlled to stop and display decorative symbols that do not constitute a combination of “big hits” or various chance eyes.

  In addition, when it is determined to be the stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP3-3 that suggests that it will be a pseudo-continuous chance after suggesting that it will reach, when the push button 31B is operated a predetermined number of times, As in the above embodiment, a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect in which the pseudo-continuous chance is stopped and displayed is executed, and if the push button 31B has not been operated a predetermined number of times, a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is displayed. The reach effect may be executed during the effect time for executing the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect by stopping the display of the decorative pattern that is in the reach state without executing it.

  FIG. 63 shows a variable display effect process (step) when the stop symbol notice effect setting process (step S511) shown in FIG. 46 is determined as the stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP3-3 in such a modification. It is a figure which shows the flow of the concrete effect operation | movement in S172). The following process is realized by the effect control CPU 120 executing the process of step S172.

  When it is determined to execute the stop symbol advance effect accompanied by the button operation promotion effect, the reach determined in step S761 in FIG. 46 is started after the decorative symbol change is started in the image display device 5 (step S2001). The notice symbol constituting the state is displayed on the image display device 5 (step S2002).

  Thereafter, an operation promotion effect such as displaying an image of the push button 31B on the image display device 5 is performed (step S2003).

  Then, it is determined whether or not the number of operations (predetermined number of times) determined in step S762 of FIG. 46 is detected for the push button 31B within the predetermined operation valid period (steps S2004 and S2005). .

  When a predetermined number of operations are detected within the operation valid period (step S2005; Yes), the notice symbol displayed on the image display device 5 is changed to the notice symbol constituting the pseudo-continuous chance (step S2006). . Thereafter, the decorative symbol corresponding to the notice symbol changed in step S2006 is stopped on the image display device 5 (step S2007).

  Thereafter, the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect is executed (step S2008), the decorative symbols constituting the reach state are stopped and displayed (step S2009), and the predetermined reach effect is executed (step S2010). The reach effect executed here is a shortened version in which the effect time of the reach effect executed in step S2013 described later is shortened. Thereafter, the display result is derived and displayed (step S2011).

  When the operation valid period has passed without the predetermined number of operations being detected (step S2004; No), the decorative symbols constituting the reach state corresponding to the notice symbols are stopped and displayed as they are (step S2012). A reach effect is executed (step S2013). The reach effect executed here is originally executed in the effect time for the execution of the “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect, so that the effect time becomes longer. Thereafter, the display result is derived and displayed (step S2011).

  FIG. 64 is a time flow of effects in such a modification. FIG. 64A shows a case where the push button 31B is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) within the operation effective period when the stop symbol notice effect is executed when the variation pattern is PB5-2. Time flow. As shown in FIG. 56 (A), in this case, after the effect branch timing (for example, at the end of the operation effective period), after the pseudo continuous fluctuation is executed, the shortened version of the reach effect (here, super reach β described later). Is shortened).

  FIG. 64B is a time flow when the push button 31B is not operated a predetermined number of times within the operation valid period when the stop symbol notice effect is executed when the variation pattern is PB5-2. . As shown in FIG. 64B, in this case, after the effect branch timing (for example, at the end of the operation valid period), the reach effect (here, super reach β) is executed.

  Thus, the content of the effect performed after that changes according to the presence or absence of the predetermined operation with respect to the push button 31B. By doing so, the player can be involved in the production content, so that the player's willingness to operate can be improved, and the interest of the game is improved.

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a display operation when a reach effect is executed. If the variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to execution of super reach α and the variable display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. After the decorative pattern change is started, the decorative pattern constituting the reach state is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (B), and the clock character image is displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (C). As shown in FIG. 65 (D), a decorative symbol which is a combination of “big hit” is derived and displayed (FIG. 65 (A) → (B) → (C) → (D)).

  When the variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to execution of super reach α and the variable display result is “losing”, as shown in FIG. After the decorative pattern change is started, the decorative pattern constituting the reach state is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (B), and the clock character image is displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (C). As shown in FIGS. 65 (E) and 65 (F), a decorative symbol as a combination of “losing” is derived and displayed (FIG. 65 (A) → (B) → (C) → (E) → (F). ).

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a display operation when a reach effect is executed. When the variation pattern is a variation pattern corresponding to execution of super reach β and the variable display result is “big hit”, as shown in FIG. After the decorative pattern change is started, the decorative pattern constituting the reach state is stopped and displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (B), and the clock character image is displayed as shown in FIG. 65 (C). As shown in FIG. 65 (E), after a decorative symbol that is a combination of “losing” is temporarily stopped, a character image of the girl is displayed as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display area 5C, the variation of the decorative symbol is resumed, and as shown in FIG. 65 (H), a decorative symbol which is a combination of “big hit” is derived and displayed (FIG. 65 (A) → (B) → (C) → (E) → (G) → H)).

  Here, for example, in the case of a variation pattern corresponding to execution of super reach β, in order to obtain a shortened version of the reach effect, the effect display in FIGS. 65 (C) and 65 (E) is omitted, Control for reducing the production time is executed. Note that the control for shortening the reach time of the reach effect is not limited to this. For example, when the variation pattern corresponds to the execution of the super reach β and the reach effect of the shortened version is used, the super reach is performed. You may make it switch to the reach production of super reach alpha with short production time from the reach production of beta. Any method can be used as long as the production time can be adjusted.

  FIG. 66 and FIG. 67 show a case in which the variable display result is a variation pattern with a variable display result of “big hit” and “pseudo-continuous”, and a stop symbol notice effect with a button operation promotion effect is executed in the modification. It is a figure which shows the other example of a display operation in the case of doing (the stop symbol notice effect pattern TZP3-3 shown in FIG. 23).

  As shown in FIGS. 66 (A) and 66 (B), in the image display device 5, after all the decorative symbols start to change, as shown in FIG. 66 (C), for example, semi-transparent or dotted numbers are used. The notice symbol shown is displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R. Here, it is assumed that it is determined in step S760 in FIG. 46 that the notice symbol is displayed only in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L. At this time, the combination of the notice symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R and the decorative symbol stopped and displayed in the “left” decorative symbol display area 5L constitutes a reach state. The player recognizes that it will be a reach.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (E), a button operation promotion effect is displayed in which an image that prompts the user to repeatedly push the push button 31B is displayed on the image display device 5.

  If the push button 31B is operated the number of times determined in step S765 of FIG. 46 within the operation valid period, the foot image is displayed and the “right” decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. 66 (F). As shown in FIG. 66G, the notice symbol in the symbol display area 5R is kicked, and the notice symbol in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5R is moved to the “middle” ornament symbol display area 5C. . As a result, the combination of the notice symbols displayed in the “left” and “middle” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5C constitutes a part of the pseudo consecutive chance eyes (here, pseudo pseudo chance eyes GC7). . As a result, the player expects that a “pseudo-continuous” variable display effect will be executed and that the possibility of a “hit” will increase.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (H), the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo-continuous chance GC7 are stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R, and as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display area 5C of “”, the decorative symbols constituting the pseudo consecutive chance eyes GC7 in combination with “left” and “right” are stopped and displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (J), all the decorative symbols change again. Thereafter, the pseudo continuous variation corresponding to the variation pattern is executed, and as shown in FIG. 66 (K), the decorations constituting the reach state are displayed in the “left” and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L and 5R. The symbol is stopped and displayed, and as shown in FIG. 66 (L), a reach effect (short version of super reach β) is executed. Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (M), the decorative symbols indicating the same numbers as “left” and “right” are also stopped and displayed in the “middle” decorative symbol display area 5C.

  On the other hand, when the push button 31B is not operated for the number of times determined in step S765 of FIG. 46 within the operation effective period at the stage of FIG. 66 (E), as shown in FIG. The notice symbol displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5R is not changed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (G), a decorative symbol corresponding to the notice symbol (for example, a black number having a different display form from the notice symbol) is stopped and displayed in the “right” decorative symbol display area 5L. It becomes a state. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 67 (H) to (J), the reach effect (super reach β) is executed. As shown in FIG. 67 (K), the decorative symbol display area 5C of “medium” is also displayed. The decorative symbols showing the same numbers as “Left” and “Right” are stopped and displayed.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the description has been given that the push button 31B is repeatedly struck for a predetermined number of times in order to change the notice symbol in the stop symbol notice effect. However, in order to change the notice symbol in the stop symbol notice effect. The production is not limited to this. In such an effect, other operation means such as a stick controller 30 (operation rod 30A or trigger button 31A), a dial-type button, or a direction key capable of instructing a direction may be used. Further, the operation method of the operation means is not limited to continuous hitting, and may be a single operation. For example, when the stick controller 30 is used as the operation means, the effect image of the aim (scope) is moved by the tilting operation with respect to the operating rod 30A, the effect of shooting is performed by the instruction operation to the trigger button 31A, and the predetermined target is set. The notice symbol may be changed when shooting down.

  In the above embodiment, in the stop symbol announcement effect, one announcement symbol is changed according to the operation of the operation means. However, a plurality of announcement symbols may be changed. For example, a notice symbol may be displayed in a plurality of decorative symbol display areas, and the notice symbol may be changed according to the number of operations on the operation means. In this case, a preview symbol indicating a number different from the decorative symbol to be stopped is displayed, and the notification symbol is changed to the preliminary symbol indicating the same number as the decorative symbol to be stopped and displayed in response to the operation means being operated.

  According to the notice symbol, the chances that can be noticed are the pseudo consecutive chance items GC1 to GC8 (such as “1”, “1”, “2”, etc., a combination in which the left symbol and the middle symbol are the same number and the right symbol is shifted by one frame), There were two opening chances TC1 to TC4 ′ (predetermined combinations composed of odd numbers), but chances other than these may be notified in advance. For example, the development opportunity may be notified. In a game machine in which a display result is pre-read at the time of start winning, and variable display before execution of variable display based on the pre-read start winning is executed, a predetermined pre-reading chance is derived and displayed. You may be able to notice the eyes. In addition, a “pseudo-ream” is executed in response to the display of a special decorative symbol (for example, a decorative symbol other than the numbers “1” to “8”) in the “medium” decorative symbol display area 5C. In a gaming machine or a “big hit (surprise)” gaming machine, a stop symbol notice effect is displayed that displays a notice symbol (corresponding to a special ornament symbol) only in the “medium” ornament symbol display area 5C. You may make it do.

  Such various chances may be determined in advance, in addition to combinations in which the right pattern is shifted by one frame, odd combinations, sequential numbers (“1”, “2”, “3”, etc.), even numbers Combinations (“2”, “4”, “6”, etc.) may be used. In addition, the decorative symbols may be grouped into several types according to color, system, character, etc., and combinations of decorative symbols in the same group may be used as chances. In addition, it is not limited to the combination of decorative symbols that are stopped and displayed in all decorative symbol display areas. Special decorative symbols (double symbols (designs that indicate multiple numbers), dodeca symbols (sizes) are displayed in some decorative symbol display areas. A symbol with a large symbol) or an almighty symbol) may be displayed as a chance. In this case, a stop symbol notice effect that displays a notice symbol corresponding to a special decorative symbol may be executed.

  When executing a stop symbol notice effect that displays a notice symbol corresponding to the ornament symbol that is stopped and displayed in the ornament symbol display area (stop symbol notice effect patterns TZP1-1, TZP2-1, TZP3-1, TZP4 shown in FIG. 23) -1), the button operation promotion effect may be executable. In such a stop symbol notice effect, when the button operation promotion effect is executed, the notice symbol may not be changed even if an operation on the operation means is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 23, in the above embodiment, after displaying the notice symbol that does not constitute the reach state, the notice symbol that constitutes the reach state or a part of the chance eye is displayed in response to the operation means being operated. Stopping to change to the warning symbol that forms part of the chance eye, after displaying the warning symbol warning effect that changes to the warning symbol that constitutes or the warning symbol that constitutes the reach state, according to the operation means being operated Although the symbol notice effect is executable, a stop symbol notice effect other than these may be executable. After notifying that a special display mode is to be obtained by a notice symbol, a stop symbol notice effect for notifying that another special display mode is to be provided may be executable. For example, after displaying the notice symbol that constitutes a part of the chance eye, the stop symbol notice effect that changes to the notice symbol that constitutes the reach state according to the operation means being operated, the unreliable reach state is constituted After displaying the warning symbol (even number) to be displayed, the stop symbol warning to change the multiple warning symbols to the warning symbol (odd number) that constitutes the probability reach state in response to the operation means being operated. You may enable it to perform production etc. In addition, if the number of rounds in the jackpot game state varies depending on which combination of decorative symbols has been set to “big hit”, display the notice symbol that constitutes the reach state of the decorative symbol with a small number of rounds, and then operate Depending on the operation of the means, it is possible to execute a stop symbol notice effect or the like that changes a plurality of notice symbols to a notice symbol (an odd number) constituting the reach state of a decorative symbol having a large number of rounds. Good. In addition, in the pseudo-continuous chance, if there is a pseudo-continuous chance (strong chance) indicating that the number of pseudo-continuous fluctuations is large or the display result is likely to be a “big hit”, After displaying the notice symbol that constitutes a part of the chance eyes (weak chance eyes) other than the chance eyes, it is changed to the notice symbol that constitutes a part of the strong chance eyes according to the operation means being operated. A stop symbol notice effect or the like may be executed. Further, it may be possible to execute a stop symbol notice effect that changes the notice symbol in a plurality of stages according to the number of times the operation means is operated. For example, after displaying a notice symbol that does not constitute a reach state, the display unit changes to a notice symbol that constitutes a reach state in response to the operation means being operated, and further, according to the operation means being operated. A stop symbol notice effect that changes to a notice symbol constituting a part of the symbol (for example, “7” is displayed on the “left”, “6” is displayed on the right, and “6” is displayed on the right according to the operation. (Changed to “7” → “8”) may be executed. In this way, after performing the advance notice of the special display mode, in response to the operation of the operating means, in order to execute the stop symbol notice effect for notifying that the special display mode will be obtained, It is desirable to change so as to give a notice that the display mode will improve the player's expectation according to the operation of the means.

  In the above-described embodiment, the stop symbol notice effect for displaying the notice symbol can be executed only in the “right” ornament symbol display area 5R, or in the “left” and “right” ornament symbol display areas 5L and 5R. However, you may make it perform the stop symbol notification effect which displays a warning symbol in all the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right". Also in this case, an effect of changing one or a plurality of notice symbols may be executed in response to the operation means being operated. It should be noted that a part of the expression such as a part of the decorative symbol display area and a part of the chance eye may be at least a part, or may indicate the whole.

  In the above embodiment, when the operation means has not been operated a predetermined number of times, as shown in FIG. 58, FIG. 60, and FIG. However, the display mode when the right symbol is changed is not limited to the one in which the right symbol is scrolled and changed as shown in FIGS. 58, 60, and 62, and the right symbol is not scrolled. It may be changed.

  In the above embodiment, the variation pattern and the special figure variation time are associated with each other and the special pattern variation time is determined simultaneously by determining the variation pattern. It may be determined separately. For example, the special figure fluctuation time may be determined after the fluctuation pattern is determined, or the fluctuation pattern may be determined after the special figure fluctuation time is determined.

  In addition, for example, the action operations such as “single push button”, “push push button”, “single trigger button”, “trigger trigger button” are reach effect, notice effect, changing promotion effect, promotion effect during jackpot It is only necessary to be executable as a part or all of the effects. Some or all of the reach, notice, fluctuating promotion, and jackpot promotion effects are “push button single shot”, “push button single shot”, “trigger button single shot”, “trigger button continuous hit”. It is not limited to what all the performance operations can be performed, and some of these performance operations may be performed. Also, depending on whether it is a reach effect, a notice effect, a fluctuating promotion effect, or a jackpot promotion effect, the combination of effect operations that can be executed may be different. For example, in the reach effect, “single trigger button” Alternatively, the “trigger button repeated strike” effect operation may be executed, while the “push button single shot” or “push button repeated hit” effect operation may be executed in the notice effect. In this way, depending on the execution timing of the production operation, the combination of all the production operations may be different. For example, the production operation of “push button continuous hitting” can be executed in either the reach production or the notice production. A combination that partially includes the same performance operation may be used. Which effect operation is to be executed depends on the determination result of the special figure display result, the determination result of the variation pattern, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of special figure hold memory, and the contents of the effect operation to be executed among others. What is necessary is just to be determined based on part or all. More generally, some or all of the rendering operations such as “single push button”, “push push button”, “single trigger button”, and “trigger trigger button” are the results of game control determination in the pachinko gaming machine 1 It suffices if it is determined whether or not to execute each production operation based on the progress situation, the determination result of other production operations, or part or all of the progression situation.

  In addition, it is determined whether or not to select and execute any one of the production operations including “single push button”, “single push button”, “single trigger button”, and “trigger trigger button”. Alternatively, it may be determined whether to select and execute each rendering operation from some rendering operations. For example, a pachinko gaming machine 1 that can execute only “push button single shot” and “trigger button single shot” performance operations may be provided, or only “push button continuous stroke” and “trigger button continuous stroke” performance operations may be provided. A pachinko gaming machine 1 that can be executed may be provided.

  In the above embodiment, the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 has been described as being capable of being tilted. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any operation device that can be held and operated in multiple directions by a player, such as a slide lever that can be slid, may be used. That is, the operation rod 30A of the stick controller 30 may be any direction operation device that allows the player to perform an instruction operation regarding the direction.

  In the above-described embodiment, it has been described that when the special figure display result is determined to be “big hit”, the big hit type may be determined to be “surprise”. In addition, the special figure display result has been described as being sometimes determined to be “small hit”. On the other hand, the special figure display result is determined as “losing” or “big hit”, and when the special figure display result is determined as “big hit”, the big hit type is determined as “non-probable change” or “probable change”. Thus, the big hit type may not be determined as “surprise” or the special figure display result may be determined as “small hit”. In this case, for example, a game caused by a delay in the game is prevented by preventing a double-open game in which almost no winning ball (out) is obtained in a two-round big hit state or a small hit game state. Decline in interest can be suppressed.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B has been described. However, the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided with one special symbol display device is also described. The invention can be applied.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 mounted on the effect control board 12 executes the notice effect setting process as shown in FIG. 45 in step S510 shown in FIG. 44, or the step S535 shown in FIG. 48, the execution control command process as shown in FIG. 48 is executed, the processes of steps S556 to S562 shown in FIG. 50 are executed, etc., and the action operation according to various operations on the stick controller 30 and the push button 31B is performed. Described as enabling execution. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, various rendering operations may be executed by a plurality of CPUs mounted on a plurality of control boards provided for controlling the rendering operations.

  As an example, a display control board is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5. The display control board only needs to be equipped with a display control CPU, a ROM, a RAM, a random number circuit, and an I / O. In this case, since the display control CPU mounted on the display control board executes processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5, it is mounted on the effect control board 12 in the above embodiment. The display control unit 123 may be mounted on the display control board. In the display control board, for example, the display control CPU executes a program read from the ROM, thereby executing a process for controlling the effect operation by displaying the effect image in the image display device 5. At this time, the display control CPU reads fixed data from the ROM, the display control CPU writes various variation data to the RAM and temporarily stores them, and the display control CPU stores the various data in the RAM. Fluctuating data reading operation for reading various temporarily stored data, receiving operation for receiving input of various signals from the outside of the display control board via the I / O display control CPU, I / O for the display controlling CPU A transmission operation for outputting various signals to the outside of the display control board via the display is also performed.

  In this case, the display control CPU, for example, based on the display control command from the effect control board 12 or the effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 through the effect control board 12, etc., the notice effect setting as shown in FIG. Execution of processing, execution of an effect control command process as shown in FIG. 48, execution of steps S556 to S562 shown in FIG. May be performed. The display control CPU only needs to execute any part of the processing executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment. Further, the sound control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 may be connected to the effect control board 12 by wiring for transmitting a control command from the effect control board 12. In this case, in the effect control board 12, for example, a process for comprehensively controlling the effect operation may be executed by the effect control CPU 120.

  Further, the functions of the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 are provided in the voice control circuit and the lamp control circuit mounted on the effect control board 12 so that independent control to be the voice control board 13 and the lamp control board 14 is performed. The substrate may not be provided. In this case, a display control board as described above is provided between the effect control board 12 and the image display device 5, and the effect control pattern determined by the effect control CPU 120 in step S512 of FIG. The display control command may be transmitted from the effect control board 12 to the display control board. In the configuration shown in FIG. 3, any one of the processes executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the above embodiment by the microcomputer mounted on the sound control board 13 and the microcomputer mounted on the lamp control board 14 is selected. May be executed. Thus, when a plurality of control boards are provided to control the rendering operation, the process for determining the control content of the display operation in the image display device 5 and the control of the audio output operation in the speakers 8L and 8R. The process for determining the control content of various effect operations, such as the process for determining the content and the process for determining the control content of the lighting operation in the light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 is performed on any control board. The combination to be executed may be any combination.

  In addition, the device configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the data configuration, the processing shown in the flowchart, the various display operations including the display operation of the display image in the display area of the image display device 5, etc. depart from the spirit of the present invention. Changes and modifications can be made arbitrarily without departing from the scope. In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of prize balls in response to detection of a winning ball, but responds to detection of a winning ball by enclosing the gaming ball. It can also be applied to enclosed game machines that give points.

  Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but in advance a computer It is possible to adopt a form distributed by pre-installing in a storage device such as a device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Gaming machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Ordinary winning ball device 6B ... Ordinary variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 11 ... Main board 12 ... Production control board 13 ... Audio control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Normal symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Start-up switch 23 ... Count switch 30 ... Stick controller 30A ... Control rod 31A ... Trigger button 31B ... Push button 32 ... Tilt direction sensor unit 35A ... Trigger sensor 35B ... Push sensor 100 ... Microcomputer 101, 121 for game control ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... Display control unit

Claims (7)

Variable display means comprising a plurality of variable display sections for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information that can be distinguished from each other and deriving and displaying the display results is provided, and a predetermined specific display result is derived in the variable display means. When displayed, a gaming machine that controls to a specific gaming state advantageous to the player,
Pre-decision means for deciding whether or not to control to the specific gaming state before the display result of the identification information is derived and displayed;
Special effect determining means for determining whether or not to execute a predetermined special effect based on the determination result of the prior determination means;
When it is determined by the special effect determining means that the special effect is to be executed, before the display result of the variable display of the identification information is derived and displayed, the display mode of the plurality of variable display units is displayed as a special display. Special effect execution means for executing the special effect after making the mode;
Before setting the display mode of the plurality of variable display units as the special display mode, in any of the plurality of variable display units, the display mode of the plurality of variable display units is any display mode. A mode informing means for informing whether or not
Operation means that can be operated by the player;
With
The aspect notification means includes
Special mode notification means for notifying that the display mode of the part of the variable display unit is a display mode constituting the special display mode;
Non-special mode notification means for notifying that the display mode of the part of the variable display unit is a display mode that does not constitute the special display mode;
After notifying that the display mode of the part of the variable display units is a display mode that does not constitute the special display mode, the notification is sent to the special display mode by the player operating the operation means. And a notification content changing means for changing the notification to a notification that the display mode is configured. The mode notifying unit may change the display modes of the other variable display units other than the at least some of the variable display units to a predetermined display mode, and then, in the at least some of the variable display units, the plurality of variable display units. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein a display mode of the display unit is notified. The special performance execution means
Reach effect executing means for executing a predetermined reach effect as the special effect after displaying the first display mode as the special display mode;
After the second display mode is displayed as the special display mode, the re-change effect execution means for executing the re-change effect for resuming variable display once or a plurality of times as the special effect,
The special effect determining means determines that the re-change effect is to be executed so that the ratio of control to the specific gaming state increases as the number of the re-change effect increases.
The mode notification means notifies the fact that the operation means is operated by the player after notifying that the display mode constituting the first display mode is displayed in the at least some of the variable display units. The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising special notification content changing means for changing the notification to notification that the display mode constituting the second display mode is set. When the operation means is operated by a player while the re-change effect execution means is informing that the special aspect notification means is in the display form constituting the first display form, Executing the re-variation effect after changing the notification to the display mode constituting the second display mode by the special notification content changing unit,
The reach production execution means performs a first display when the operation means is not operated while the special aspect notification means is informing that the special display means is in the display form constituting the first display form. The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the reach effect is executed after displaying the mode. Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, variable display time determination means for determining the time from the start of variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed;
Derivation display means for deriving and displaying a display result on the variable display means when the time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed since the variable information time display started.
The variable display time determining means determines a specific time when the special effect executing means executes the special effect,
The special performance execution means
When the operation means is operated by a player when the non-special mode notification means performs notification that the display mode does not constitute the special display mode, the display mode of the plurality of variable display units The special effect is executed after the notification content changing means is changed to the notification that the display mode constitutes the special display mode.
When the operation means is not operated when the non-special mode notification unit is informing that the display mode does not constitute the special display mode, the display mode of the plurality of variable display units is After changing to a display mode that configures the special display mode, after performing a display mode that does not configure a special display mode,
The derivation display means is configured to identify the identification regardless of whether the operation means is operated or not when performing notification that the non-special aspect notification means is in a display mode that does not constitute the special display mode. The display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means when the specific time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed since the variable display of information was started. The gaming machine according to any one of the above. Based on the determination result of the prior determination means, variable display time determination means for determining the time from the start of variable display of the identification information until the display result is derived and displayed;
Derivation display means for deriving and displaying a display result on the variable display means when the time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed since the variable information time display started.
The variable display time determining means determines a specific time when the special effect executing means executes the special effect,
The re-variation effect execution means includes:
When the operation means is operated by a player while the special mode notification unit is informing that the display mode constituting the first display mode is being performed, the display mode of the plurality of variable display units The special notification content changing means to change the notification to the effect that the display mode constituting the second display mode is changed, and execute the re-variation effect,
When the special mode notification unit is informing that the display mode constituting the first display mode is being performed and the operation unit is not operated, the display mode of the plurality of variable display units is After changing to the second display mode after the first display mode, the re-variation effect is executed,
The derivation display means is configured to recognize the identification regardless of whether or not the operation means is operated when the special aspect notification means is informing that the special display means is in the display form constituting the first display form. The display result is derived and displayed on the variable display means when the specific time determined by the variable display time determination means has elapsed since the variable display of information was started. Game machines. The notification content changing means is a display mode that configures the special display mode to notify that the display mode does not configure the special display mode when the operation unit is operated a predetermined number of times by the player. Change to the notification of the effect,
The special notification content changing unit displays a notification indicating that the display mode constituting the first display mode is displayed in the second display mode when the operation unit is operated a predetermined number of times by the player. Change to notification that it will be an aspect,
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, further comprising: a number-of-times determining unit that determines the predetermined number of times based on a determination result of the prior-determining unit.

Images